You are on page 1of 497

Check Point VPN-1 Edge

Internet Security Appliance

User Guide

Version 6.0

Part No: 700800, November 2005


COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
Copyright © 2005 SofaWare, All Rights Reserved. No part of this distribute and/or modify the software.
document may be reproduced in any form or by any means without
written permission from SofaWare. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on,
does not represent a commitment on part of SofaWare Technologies we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original,
Ltd. so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the
SofaWare, Safe@Home and Safe@Office are trademarks, service original authors' reputations.
marks, or registered trademarks of SofaWare Technologies Ltd. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents.
Check Point, the Check Point logo, FireWall-1, FireWall-1 We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will
SecureServer, FireWall-1 SmallOffice, FloodGate-1, INSPECT, IQ individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
Engine, Meta IP, MultiGate, Open Security Extension, OPSEC, proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent
Provider-1, SecureKnowledge, SecureUpdate, SiteManager-1, SVN, must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
UAM, User-to-Address Mapping, UserAuthority, Visual Policy The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
Editor, VPN-1, VPN-1 Accelerator Card, VPN-1 Gateway, VPN-1 modification follow.
SecureClient, VPN-1 SecuRemote, VPN-1 SecureServer, and VPN-1
Edge are trademarks, service marks, or registered trademarks of Check GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Point Software Technologies Ltd. or its affiliates. FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
All other product names mentioned herein are trademarks or registered 0. This License applies to any program or other work which
trademarks of their respective owners. contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be
distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The
The products described in this document are protected by U.S. Patent "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work
No. 5,606,668 and 5,835,726 and may be protected by other U.S. based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative
Patents, foreign patents, or pending applications. work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee
Version 2, June 1991 is addressed as "you".
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is
license document, but changing it is not allowed. covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program
(independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether
PREAMBLE that is true depends on what the Program does.
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices
General Public License applies to most of the Free Software that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give
Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with
commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is the Program.
covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You
can apply it to your programs, too. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not fee.
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
free programs; and that you know you can do these things. above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent
to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These notices stating that you changed the files and the date of
restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute any change.
copies of the software, or if you modify it. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish,
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at
have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands
interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access
to print or display an announcement including an to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the
warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
that users may redistribute the program under these source along with the object code.
conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
does not normally print such an announcement, your work otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
based on the Program is not required to print an void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
announcement.) However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, parties remain in full compliance.
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
it. Program or works based on it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on
rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
based on the Program. these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You
Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this
volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other License.
work under the scope of this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
machine-readable source code, which must be distributed License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
customarily used for software interchange; or, license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
than your cost of physically performing source
distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
corresponding source code, to be distributed under the any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
used for software interchange; or, circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such
the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This
claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution
the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public
and only if you received the program in object code or
license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to
executable form with such an offer, in accord with
the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
Subsection b above.)
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control be a consequence of the rest of this License.
compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
the executable.
countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the ƒ When installing the appliance, ensure that the vents are not
limitation as if written in the body of this License. blocked.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new ƒ Do not place this product on an unstable surface or support.
versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult,
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ as well as serious damage to the product.
in detail to address new problems or concerns. ƒ Do not use the appliance outdoors.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program ƒ Do not expose the appliance to liquid or moisture.
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
later version", you have the option of following the terms and ƒ Do not expose the appliance to extreme high or low
conditions either of that version or of any later version published by temperatures.
the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a ƒ Do not disassemble or open the appliance. Failure to comply
version number of this License, you may choose any version ever will void the warranty.
published by the Free Software Foundation.
ƒ Do not use any accessories other than those approved by
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free Check Point. Failure to do so may result in loss of
programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the performance, damage to the product, fire, electric shock or
author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the injury, and will void the warranty.
Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
ƒ Route power supply cords where they are not likely to be
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by
walked on or pinched by items placed on or against them. Pay
the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free
particular attention to cords where they are attached to plugs
software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
and convenience receptacles, and examine the point where
NO WARRANTY they exit the unit.
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF ƒ Do not connect or disconnect power supply cables and data
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO transmission lines during thunderstorms.
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
ƒ Do not overload wall outlets or extension cords, as this can
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Overloaded AC outlets,
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
extension cords, frayed power cords, damaged or cracked wire
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
insulation, and broken plugs are dangerous. They may result in
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
a shock or fire hazard. Periodically examine the cord, and if its
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
appearance indicates damage or deteriorated insulation, have it
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
replaced by your service technician.
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ƒ If the unit or any part of it is damaged, disconnect the power
THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST plug and inform the responsible service personnel. Non-
OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. observance may result in damage to the router.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY POWER ADAPTER
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ƒ Operate this product only from the type of power source
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING indicated on the product’s marking label. If you are not sure of
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR the type of power supplied to your home, consult your dealer
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR or local power company.
INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT
ƒ Use only the power supply provided with your product. Check
LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
whether the device’s set supply voltage is the same as the local
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
supply voltage.
PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE
WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR ƒ To reduce risk of damage to the unit, remove it from the outlet
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF by holding the power adapter rather than the cord.
SUCH DAMAGES.
To receive the SofaWare GPL licensed code, contact
info@sofaware.com. SECURITY DISCLAIMER
The appliance provides your office network with the highest level of
security. However, no single security product can provide you with
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS absolute protection against a determined effort to break into your
system. We recommend using additional security measures to secure
Carefully read the Safety Instructions the Installation and Operating
highly valuable or sensitive information.
Procedures provided in this User's Guide before attempting to install
or operate the appliance. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in damage to equipment and/or personal injuries.
ƒ Before cleaning the appliance, unplug the power cord. Use
only a soft cloth dampened with water for cleaning.
Contents

Contents
About This Guide .................................................................................................................................xi
Chapter 1: Introduction .......................................................................................................................1
About Your Check Point VPN-1 Edge Appliance ..............................................................................1
VPN-1 Edge Products .........................................................................................................................2
VPN-1 Edge Features and Compatibility............................................................................................3
Connectivity....................................................................................................................................3
Firewall ...........................................................................................................................................4
VPN ................................................................................................................................................5
Management....................................................................................................................................5
Optional Security Services..............................................................................................................6
Package Contents ............................................................................................................................6
Network Requirements ...................................................................................................................7
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X series Appliance ....................................................................8
Rear Panel .......................................................................................................................................8
Front Panel ......................................................................................................................................9
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W Series Appliance.................................................................11
Rear Panel .....................................................................................................................................11
Front Panel ....................................................................................................................................13
Contacting Technical Support...........................................................................................................15
Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance...................................................17
Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance ................................................................................17
Windows 2000/XP ........................................................................................................................18
Windows 98/Millennium ..............................................................................................................23
Mac OS .........................................................................................................................................28
Mac OS-X .....................................................................................................................................30
Wall Mounting the Appliance ...........................................................................................................32

Contents i
Contents

Securing the Appliance against Theft ...............................................................................................34


Network Installation..........................................................................................................................37
Setting Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance.............................................................................................38
Chapter 3: Getting Started.................................................................................................................41
Initial Login to the VPN-1 Edge Portal.............................................................................................41
Logging on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal ..............................................................................................44
Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely Using HTTPS ............................................................46
Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal ...........................................................................................................48
Main Menu....................................................................................................................................49
Main Frame...................................................................................................................................50
Status Bar ......................................................................................................................................50
Logging off .......................................................................................................................................53
Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection.............................................................................55
Overview...........................................................................................................................................55
Using the Internet Wizard .................................................................................................................56
Using a Direct LAN Connection...................................................................................................58
Using a Cable Modem Connection ...............................................................................................60
Using a PPTP or PPPoE Dialer Connection..................................................................................61
Using PPPoE.................................................................................................................................62
Using PPTP...................................................................................................................................63
Using Internet Setup..........................................................................................................................65
Using a LAN Connection..............................................................................................................66
Using a Cable Modem Connection ...............................................................................................68
Using a PPPoE Connection...........................................................................................................70
Using a PPTP Connection.............................................................................................................72
Using a Telstra (BPA) Connection ...............................................................................................74
Using a Dialup Connection ...........................................................................................................76

ii Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Contents

Using No Connection....................................................................................................................78
Setting Up a Dialup Modem .............................................................................................................85
Viewing Internet Connection Information ........................................................................................88
Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection .....................................................................................90
Using Quick Internet Connection/Disconnection..............................................................................92
Configuring a Backup Internet Connection.......................................................................................92
Setting Up a LAN or Broadband Backup Connection ..................................................................92
Setting Up a Dialup Backup Connection ......................................................................................93
Chapter 5: Managing Your Network ................................................................................................95
Configuring Network Settings ..........................................................................................................95
Configuring a DHCP Server .........................................................................................................96
Changing IP Addresses ...............................................................................................................107
Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT....................................................................................................108
Configuring a DMZ Network......................................................................................................109
Configuring the OfficeMode Network........................................................................................111
Configuring VLANs ...................................................................................................................113
Configuring High Availability ........................................................................................................121
Configuring High Availability on a Gateway .............................................................................123
Sample Implementation on Two Gateways.................................................................................127
Adding and Editing Network Objects .........................................................................................131
Viewing and Deleting Network Objects .....................................................................................139
Using Static Routes.........................................................................................................................140
Adding and Editing Static Routes ...............................................................................................140
Viewing and Deleting Static Routes ...........................................................................................145
Managing Ports ...............................................................................................................................146
Viewing Port Statuses .................................................................................................................147
Modifying Port Assignments ......................................................................................................148

Contents iii
Contents

Modifying Link Configurations ..................................................................................................150


Resetting Ports to Defaults..........................................................................................................150
Chapter 6: Using Traffic Shaper .....................................................................................................153
Overview.........................................................................................................................................153
Setting Up Traffic Shaper ...............................................................................................................154
Predefined QoS Classes ..................................................................................................................155
Adding and Editing Classes ............................................................................................................156
Deleting Classes..............................................................................................................................161
Restoring Traffic Shaper Defaults...................................................................................................162
Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network ..................................................................................163
Overview.........................................................................................................................................163
About the Wireless Hardware in Your VPN-1 Edge W series Appliance ......................................164
Wireless Security Protocols ............................................................................................................165
Manually Configuring a WLAN .....................................................................................................167
Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard ......................................................................................178
WPA-PSK ...................................................................................................................................180
WEP ............................................................................................................................................182
No Security .................................................................................................................................183
Preparing the Wireless Stations.......................................................................................................184
Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity..........................................................................................185
Chapter 8: Viewing Reports.............................................................................................................189
Viewing the Event Log ...................................................................................................................189
Using the Traffic Monitor ...............................................................................................................193
Viewing Traffic Reports .............................................................................................................193
Exporting General Traffic Reports..............................................................................................195
Configuring Traffic Monitor Settings .........................................................................................195
Viewing Computers ........................................................................................................................196

iv Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Contents

Viewing Connections ......................................................................................................................199


Viewing Wireless Statistics.............................................................................................................200
Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy.........................................................................................205
Default Security Policy ...................................................................................................................206
Setting the Firewall Security Level.................................................................................................207
Configuring Servers ........................................................................................................................210
Using Rules .....................................................................................................................................212
Adding and Editing Rules ...........................................................................................................216
Enabling/Disabling Rules ...........................................................................................................222
Changing Rules' Priority .............................................................................................................222
Deleting Rules.............................................................................................................................223
Using SmartDefense .......................................................................................................................223
Configuring SmartDefense..........................................................................................................224
SmartDefense Categories............................................................................................................226
Using Secure HotSpot .....................................................................................................................261
Setting Up Secure HotSpot .........................................................................................................262
Enabling/Disabling Secure HotSpot............................................................................................263
Customizing Secure HotSpot ......................................................................................................264
Defining an Exposed Host ..............................................................................................................266
Chapter 10: Using VStream Antivirus ............................................................................................269
Overview.........................................................................................................................................269
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antivirus...........................................................................................271
Viewing VStream Signature Database Information ........................................................................272
Configuring VStream Antivirus ......................................................................................................273
Configuring the VStream Antivirus Policy.................................................................................273
Configuring VStream Advanced Settings ...................................................................................281
Updating VStream Antivirus...........................................................................................................285

Contents v
Contents

Chapter 11: SMART Management and Subscription Services.....................................................287


Connecting to a Service Center.......................................................................................................288
Viewing Services Information ........................................................................................................293
Refreshing Your Service Center Connection ..................................................................................294
Configuring Your Account .............................................................................................................294
Disconnecting from Your Service Center .......................................................................................295
Web Filtering ..................................................................................................................................296
Enabling/Disabling Web Filtering ..............................................................................................296
Selecting Categories for Blocking ..............................................................................................297
Temporarily Disabling Web Filtering .........................................................................................298
Email Filtering ................................................................................................................................300
Enabling/Disabling Email Filtering ............................................................................................301
Selecting Protocols for Scanning ................................................................................................302
Temporarily Disabling Email Filtering .......................................................................................302
Automatic and Manual Updates......................................................................................................304
Checking for Software Updates when Locally Managed............................................................304
Checking for Software Updates when Remotely Managed ........................................................305
Chapter 12: Working with VPNs.....................................................................................................307
Overview.........................................................................................................................................308
Site-to-Site VPNs........................................................................................................................310
Remote Access VPNs .................................................................................................................312
Internal VPN Server....................................................................................................................313
Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server ............................................................314
Configuring the Remote Access VPN Server .............................................................................316
Configuring the Internal VPN Server..........................................................................................317
Installing SecuRemote ................................................................................................................319
Adding and Editing VPN Sites .......................................................................................................319

vi Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Contents

Configuring a Remote Access VPN Site.....................................................................................322


Configuring a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway ...................................................................................335
Deleting a VPN Site ........................................................................................................................351
Enabling/Disabling a VPN Site.......................................................................................................352
Logging on to a Remote Access VPN Site......................................................................................353
Logging on through the VPN-1 Edge Portal...............................................................................353
Logging on through the my.vpn page .........................................................................................355
Logging off a Remote Access VPN Site .........................................................................................357
Installing a Certificate .....................................................................................................................357
Generating a Self-Signed Certificate...........................................................................................358
Importing a Certificate ................................................................................................................362
Uninstalling a Certificate ................................................................................................................364
Viewing VPN Tunnels ....................................................................................................................365
Viewing IKE Traces for VPN Connections ....................................................................................368
Chapter 13: Managing Users ...........................................................................................................371
Changing Your Password................................................................................................................371
Adding and Editing Users ...............................................................................................................373
Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users ...............................................................................................377
Viewing and Deleting Users ...........................................................................................................379
Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users .....................................................................................380
Using RADIUS Authentication.......................................................................................................380
Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-Specific Attribute.....................................................................385
Chapter 14: Maintenance .................................................................................................................389
Viewing Firmware Status................................................................................................................389
Updating the Firmware ...................................................................................................................391
Upgrading Your Software Product..................................................................................................393
Registering Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance ......................................................................................397

Contents vii
Contents

Configuring Syslog Logging...........................................................................................................398


Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line..........................................................................400
Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal .....................................................................................................400
Using the Serial Console.............................................................................................................402
Configuring HTTPS........................................................................................................................404
Configuring SSH.............................................................................................................................406
Configuring SNMP .........................................................................................................................408
Setting the Time on the Appliance..................................................................................................411
Using Diagnostic Tools...................................................................................................................415
Using IP Tools ............................................................................................................................416
Using Packet Sniffer ...................................................................................................................418
Filter String Syntax .....................................................................................................................421
Backing Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration..................................................................429
Exporting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration.................................................................429
Importing the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration.................................................................430
Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults ..........................................................................432
Running Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................435
Rebooting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance ...........................................................................................436
Chapter 15: Using Network Printers...............................................................................................437
Overview.........................................................................................................................................437
Setting Up Network Printers ...........................................................................................................438
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers ...........................................................................439
Windows 2000/XP ......................................................................................................................439
MAC OS-X .................................................................................................................................445
Viewing Network Printers...............................................................................................................449
Changing Network Printer Ports .....................................................................................................449
Resetting Network Printers .............................................................................................................450

viii Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Contents

Chapter 16: Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................451


Connectivity ....................................................................................................................................452
Service Center and Upgrades ..........................................................................................................456
Other Problems ...............................................................................................................................457
Chapter 17: Specifications................................................................................................................459
Technical Specifications .................................................................................................................459
CE Declaration of Conformity ........................................................................................................462
Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement ..........................464
Glossary of Terms .............................................................................................................................465
Index...................................................................................................................................................473

Contents ix
About Your Check Point VPN-1 Edge Appliance

About This Guide


To make finding information in this manual easier, some types of information are
marked with special symbols or formatting.
Boldface type is used for command and button names.

Note: Notes are denoted by indented text and preceded by the Note icon.

Warning: Warnings are denoted by indented text and preceded by the Warning icon.

Each task is marked with a product bar indicating the VPN-1 Edge products
required to perform the task. If you cannot perform the task using a particular
product, that product is crossed out. For example, the product bar below indicates a
task that requires VPN-1 Edge W8, W16, W32, or WU.

Chapter 1: About This Guide xi


About Your Check Point VPN-1 Edge Appliance

Chapter 1

Introduction
This chapter introduces the Check Point VPN-1 Edge appliance and this guide.
This chapter includes the following topics:
About Your Check Point VPN-1 Edge Appliance........................................1
VPN-1 Edge Products...................................................................................2
VPN-1 Edge Features and Compatibility .....................................................3
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X series Appliance .............................8
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W Series Appliance..........................11
Contacting Technical Support ....................................................................15

About Your Check Point VPN-1 Edge Appliance


The Check Point VPN-1 Edge appliance is an advanced Internet security appliance
that enables secure high-speed Internet access from the office. Developed by
SofaWare Technologies, an affiliate of Check Point Software Technologies, the
worldwide leader in securing the Internet, the VPN-1 Edge appliance incorporates
the X and W product families. The VPN-1 Edge firewall, based on the world-
leading Check Point Embedded NGX Stateful Inspection technology, inspects and
filters all incoming and outgoing traffic, blocking all unauthorized traffic.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance also allows sharing your Internet connection among
several PCs or other network devices, enabling advanced office networking and
saving the cost of purchasing static IP addresses.
All VPN-1 Edge appliances can be integrated into an overall enterprise security
policy for maximum security. Check Point's Security Management Architecture
(SMART) delivers a single enterprise-wide security policy that you can centrally
manage and automatically deploy to an unlimited number of VPN-1 Edge
gateways.

Chapter 1: Introduction 1
VPN-1 Edge Products

You can also connect VPN-1 Edge appliances to security services available from
select service providers, including firewall security and software updates, Web
Filtering, reporting, VPN management, and Dynamic DNS. Business users can use
the VPN-1 Edge appliance to securely connect to the corporate network.

VPN-1 Edge Products


The VPN-1 Edge appliance is available with the following hardware:
• VPN-1 Edge X series
This series includes the following models:
• VPN-1 Edge X8
• VPN-1 Edge X16
• VPN-1 Edge X32
• VPN-1 Edge XU
• VPN-1 Edge W series
This series includes the following models:
• VPN-1 Edge W8
• VPN-1 Edge W16
• VPN-1 Edge W32
• VPN-1 Edge WU
You can upgrade your VPN-1 Edge appliance to a more advanced model within its
hardware series, without replacing the hardware. Contact your reseller for more
details.

2 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


VPN-1 Edge Features and Compatibility

VPN-1 Edge Features and Compatibility


Connectivity
All VPN-1 Edge models have the following features:
• LAN ports: 4-ports 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet switch
• WAN port: 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet
• DMZ/WAN2 Port: 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet
• Serial (RS232) port for console access and dialup modem connection
• Supported Internet connection methods: Static IP, DHCP Client, Cable
Modem, PPTP Client, PPPoE Client, Telstra BPA login, Dialup
• Concurrent firewall connections: 8,000
• DHCP server, client, and relay
• MAC cloning
• Static NAT
• Static routes and source routes
• Ethernet cable type recognition
• Backup Internet connection
• Dead Internet Connection Detection (DCD)
• Traffic Monitoring
• Traffic Shaping
• VLAN Support
• Dynamic Routing
• High Availability

Chapter 1: Introduction 3
VPN-1 Edge Features and Compatibility

The VPN-1 Edge W includes the following additional features:


• Wireless LAN interface with dual diversity antennas supporting up to 108
Mbps (Super G) and Extended Range (XR)
• Wireless QoS (WMM)
• Integrated USB print server

Firewall
All VPN-1 Edge models have the following features:
• Check Point Firewall-1 Embedded NGX firewall with Application
Intelligence
• Intrusion Detection and Prevention using Check Point SmartDefense
• Network Address Translation (NAT)
• Three preset security policies
• Unlimited INSPECT Policy Rules
• Anti-spoofing
• Voice over IP (H.323) support
• Instant messenger blocking/monitoring
• P2P file sharing blocking/monitoring

4 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


VPN-1 Edge Features and Compatibility

VPN
All VPN-1 Edge models have the following features:
• Remote Access VPN Server with OfficeMode and RADIUS support
• Remote Access VPN Client
• Site-to-Site VPN Gateway
• IPSEC VPN pass-through
• Algorithms: AES/3DES/DES, SHA1/MD5
• Hardware Based Secure RNG (Random Number Generator)
• IPSec NAT traversal (NAT-T)
• Route-based VPN
• Backup VPN gateways

Management
All VPN-1 Edge models have the following features:
• Management via HTTP, HTTPS, SSH, SNMP, Serial CLI
• Central Management: Check Point SmartCenter, Check Point SmartLSM,
Check Point SmartUpdate, CheckPoint Provider-1, SofaWare SMP
• NTP automatic time setting
• TFTP Rapid Deployment
• Local diagnostics tools: Ping, WHOIS, Packet Sniffer, VPN Tunnel
Monitor, Connection Table Monitor, Wireless Monitor, Active Computers
Display, Local Logs

Chapter 1: Introduction 5
VPN-1 Edge Features and Compatibility

Optional Security Services


The following subscription security services are available to VPN-1 Edge owners
by connecting to a Service Center:
• Firewall Security and Software Updates
• Web Filtering
• Email Antivirus and Antispam Protection
• VStream Embedded Antivirus Updates
• Dynamic DNS Service
• VPN Management
• Security Reporting
• Vulnerability Scanning Service

Package Contents
All VPN-1 Edge series include the following:
• VPN-1 Edge Internet Security Appliance
• Power adapter
• CAT5 Straight-through Ethernet cable
• Getting Started Guide
• This Users Guide
The VPN-1 Edge W series also includes:
• Two antennas
• Wall mounting kit, including two plastic conical anchors and two cross-
head screws
• USB extension cable

6 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


VPN-1 Edge Features and Compatibility

Network Requirements
• A broadband Internet connection via cable or DSL modem with Ethernet
interface (RJ-45)
• 10BaseT or 100BaseT Network Interface Card installed on each computer
• TCP/IP network protocol installed on each computer
• Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher, or Netscape Navigator 4.7 and higher
• CAT 5 STP (Category 5 Shielded Twisted Pair) Straight Through Ethernet
cable for each attached device

Note: The VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically detects cable types, so you can use
either a straight-through or crossed cable, when cascading an additional hub or
switch to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Note: For optimal results, it is highly recommended to use either Microsoft Internet
Explorer 5.5 or higher, or Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or higher.

• When using VPN-1 Edge W, an 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11 Super G


wireless card installed on each wireless station

Chapter 1: Introduction 7
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X series Appliance

Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X series


Appliance

Rear Panel
The following figure shows the VPN-1 Edge X series appliance's rear panel. All
physical connections (network and power) to the VPN-1 Edge appliance are made
via the rear panel of your VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Figure 1: VPN-1 Edge X Appliance Rear Panel Items


The following table lists the VPN-1 Edge X appliance's rear panel elements.

Table 1: VPN-1 Edge X Appliance Rear Panel Elements

Label Description

PWR A power jack used for supplying power to the unit. Connect the supplied power
adapter to this jack.

8 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X series Appliance

Label Description

RESET A button used for rebooting the VPN-1 Edge appliance or resetting the VPN-1
Edge appliance to its factory defaults. You need to use a pointed object to press
this button.

• Short press. Reboots the VPN-1 Edge appliance


• Long press (7 seconds). Resets the VPN-1 Edge appliance to its factory
defaults, and resets your firmware to the version that shipped with the
VPN-1 Edge appliance. This results in the loss of all security services
and passwords and reverting to the factory default firmware. You will
have to re-configure your VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Do not reset the unit without consulting your system administrator.

RS-232 A serial port used for connecting computers in order to access the VPN-1 Edge
CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup modem

WAN Wide Area Network: An Ethernet port (RJ-45) used for connecting your cable or
xDSL modem, or for connecting a hub when setting up more than one Internet
connection

DMZ/ A dedicated Ethernet port (RJ-45) used to connect a DMZ (Demilitarized Zone)
WAN2 computer or network. Alternatively, can serve as a secondary WAN port , or as a
VLAN trunk.

LAN 1-4 Local Area Network switch: Four Ethernet ports (RJ-45) used for connecting
computers or other network devices

Front Panel
The VPN-1 Edge X appliances includes several status LEDs that enable you to
monitor the appliance’s operation.

Figure 2: VPN-1 Edge X Appliance Front Panel

Chapter 1: Introduction 9
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X series Appliance

For an explanation of the VPN-1 Edge X appliance’s status LEDs, see the table
below.

Table 2: VPN-1 Edge X Appliance Status LEDs

LED State Explanation

PWR/SEC Off Power off

Flashing quickly (Green) System boot-up

Flashing slowly (Green) Establishing Internet connection

On (Green) Normal operation

Flashing (Red) Hacker attack blocked

On (Red) Error

LAN 1- LINK/ACT Off, 100 Off Link is down


4/WAN/
DMZ/WAN2

LINK/ACT On, 100 Off 10 Mbps link established for the


corresponding port

LINK/ACT On, 100 On 100 Mbps link established for the


corresponding port

LNK/ACT Flashing Data is being transmitted/received

VPN Flashing (Green) VPN port in use

Serial Flashing (Green) Serial port in use

10 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W Series Appliance

Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W Series


Appliance

Rear Panel
All physical connections (network and power) to the VPN-1 Edge appliance are
made via the rear panel of your VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Figure 3: VPN-1 Edge W Appliance Rear Panel Items


The following table lists the VPN-1 Edge W appliance's rear panel elements.

Table 3: VPN-1 Edge W Appliance Rear Panel Elements

Label Description

PWR A power jack used for supplying power to the unit. Connect the supplied power
adapter to this jack.

Chapter 1: Introduction 11
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W Series Appliance

Label Description

RESET A button used for rebooting the VPN-1 Edge appliance or resetting the VPN-1
Edge appliance to its factory defaults. You need to use a pointed object to press
this button.

• Short press. Reboots the VPN-1 Edge appliance


• Long press (7 seconds). Resets the VPN-1 Edge appliance to its factory
defaults, and resets your firmware to the version that shipped with the
VPN-1 Edge appliance. This results in the loss of all security services
and passwords and reverting to the factory default firmware. You will
have to re-configure your VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Do not reset the unit without consulting your system administrator.

USB Two USB 2.0 ports used for connecting USB-based printers

RS232 A serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access the VPN-
1 Edge CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup
modem

WAN Wide Area Network: An Ethernet port (RJ-45) used for connecting your cable or
xDSL modem, or for connecting a hub when setting up more than one Internet
connection

DMZ/ A dedicated Ethernet port (RJ-45) used to connect a DMZ (Demilitarized Zone)
WAN2 computer or network. Alternatively, can serve as a secondary WAN port , or as a
VLAN trunk.

LAN 1-4 Local Area Network switch: Four Ethernet ports (RJ-45) used for connecting
computers or other network devices

ANT 1/ Antenna connectors, used to connect the supplied wireless antennas


ANT 2

12 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W Series Appliance

Front Panel
The VPN-1 Edge W appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to
monitor the appliance’s operation.

Figure 4: VPN-1 Edge W Appliance Front Panel


For an explanation of the VPN-1 Edge W appliance’s status LEDs, see the table
below.

Chapter 1: Introduction 13
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W Series Appliance

Table 4: VPN-1 Edge W Appliance Status LEDs

LED State Explanation

PWR/SEC Off Power off

Flashing quickly (Green) System boot-up

Flashing slowly (Green) Establishing Internet connection

On (Green) Normal operation

Flashing (Red) Hacker attack blocked

On (Red) Error

Flashing (Orange) Software update in progress

LAN 1-4/ LINK/ACT Off, 100 Off Link is down


WAN/
DMZ/WAN2

LINK/ACT On, 100 Off 10 Mbps link established for the


corresponding port

LINK/ACT On, 100 On 100 Mbps link established for the


corresponding port

LNK/ACT Flashing Data is being transmitted/received

VPN Flashing (Green) VPN port in use

Serial Flashing (Green) Serial port in use

USB Flashing (Green) USB port in use

WLAN Flashing (Green) WLAN in use

14 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Contacting Technical Support

Contacting Technical Support


If there is a problem with your VPN-1 Edge appliance, see
http://www.checkpoint.com/techsupport/.
You can also download the latest version of this guide from the Check Point
software subscription website.

Chapter 1: Introduction 15
Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

Chapter 2

Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge


Appliance
This chapter describes how to properly set up and install your VPN-1 Edge
appliance in your networking environment.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance..........................................17
Wall Mounting the Appliance ....................................................................32
Securing the Appliance against Theft.........................................................34
Network Installation ...................................................................................37
Setting Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance ......................................................38

Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance


Prior to connecting and setting up your VPN-1 Edge appliance for operation, you
must do the following:
• Check if TCP/IP Protocol is installed on your computer.
• Check your computer’s TCP/IP settings to make sure it obtains its IP
address automatically.
Refer to the relevant section in this guide in accordance with the operating system
that runs on your computer. The sections below will guide you through the TCP/IP
setup and installation process.

Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance 17


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

Windows 2000/XP
Note: While Windows XP has an "Internet Connection Firewall" option, it is
recommended to disable it if you are using a VPN-1 Edge appliance, since the
VPN-1 Edge appliance offers better protection.

Checking the TCP/IP Installation


1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel.
The Control Panel window appears.

2. Double-click the Network and Dial-up Connections icon.

18 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

The Network and Dial-up Connections window appears.

3. Right-click the icon and select Properties from the pop-up menu that
opens.

Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance 19


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

The Local Area Connection Properties window appears.

4. In the above window, check if TCP/IP appears in the components list and if it is
properly configured with the Ethernet card, installed on your computer. If
TCP/IP does not appear in the Components list, you must install it as described in
the next section.

20 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

Installing TCP/IP Protocol


1. In the Local Area Connection Properties window click Install….
The Select Network Component Type window appears.

2. Choose Protocol and click Add.


The Select Network Protocol window appears.

3. Choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click OK.


TCP/IP protocol is installed on your computer.

Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance 21


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

TCP/IP Settings
1. In the Local Area Connection Properties window double-click the Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) component, or select it and click Properties.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window opens.

2. Click the Obtain an IP address automatically radio button.

Note: Normally, it is not recommended to assign a static IP address to your PC but


rather to obtain an IP address automatically. If for some reason you need to assign
a static IP address, select Specify an IP address, type in an IP address in the range of
192.168.10.129-254, enter 255.255.255.0 in the Subnet Mask field, and click OK to
save the new settings.

(Note that 192.168.10 is the default value, and it may vary if you changed it in the
My Network page.)

3. Click the Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button.


4. Click OK to save the new settings.
Your computer is now ready to access your VPN-1 Edge appliance.

22 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

Windows 98/Millennium
Checking the TCP/IP Installation
1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel.
The Control Panel window appears.

2. Double-click the icon.

Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance 23


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

The Network window appears.

3. In the Network window, check if TCP/IP appears in the network components list
and if it is already configured with the Ethernet card, installed on your
computer.

Installing TCP/IP Protocol


Note: If TCP/IP is already installed and configured on your computer skip this
section and move directly to TCP/IP Settings.

1. In the Network window, click Add.

24 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

The Select Network Component Type window appears.

2. Choose Protocol and click Add.


The Select Network Protocol window appears.

3. In the Manufacturers list choose Microsoft, and in the Network Protocols list
choose TCP/IP.
4. Click OK.
If Windows asks for original Windows installation files, provide the installation
CD and relevant path when required (e.g. D:\win98)
5. Restart your computer if prompted.

Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance 25


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

TCP/IP Settings
Note: If you are connecting your VPN-1 Edge appliance to an
existing LAN, consult your network manager for the correct
configurations.

1. In the Network window, double-click the TCP/IP service for the Ethernet card,
which has been installed on your computer
(e.g. ).
The TCP/IP Properties window opens.

2. Click the Gateway tab, and remove any installed gateways.

26 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

3. Click the DNS Configuration tab, and click the Disable DNS radio button.

Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance 27


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

4. Click the IP Address tab, and click the Obtain an IP address automatically radio
button.

Note: Normally, it is not recommended to assign a static IP


address to your PC but rather to obtain an IP address
automatically. If for some reason you need to assign a static IP
address, select Specify an IP address, type in an IP address in the
range of 192.168.10.129-254, enter 255.255.255.0 in the
Subnet Mask field, and click OK to save the new settings.

(Note that 192.168.10 is the default value, and it may vary if you
changed it in the My Network page.)

5. Click Yes when prompted for “Do you want to restart your computer?”.
Your computer restarts, and the new settings to take effect.
Your computer is now ready to access your VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Mac OS
Use the following procedure for setting up the TCP/IP Protocol.

28 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

1. Choose Apple Menus -> Control Panels -> TCP/IP.


The TCP/IP window appears.

2. Click the Connect via drop-down list, and select Ethernet.


3. Click the Configure drop-down list, and select Using DHCP Server.
4. Close the window and save the setup.

Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance 29


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

Mac OS-X
Use the following procedure for setting up the TCP/IP Protocol.
1. Choose Apple -> System Preferences.
The System Preferences window appears.

2. Click Network.
The Network window appears.

30 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

3. Click Configure.

Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance 31


Wall Mounting the Appliance

TCP/IP configuration fields appear.

4. Click the Configure IPv4 drop-down list, and select Using DHCP.
5. Click Apply Now.

Wall Mounting the Appliance

If desired, you can mount your VPN-1 Edge W series appliance on the wall.

To mount the VPN-1 Edge appliance on the wall


1. Decide where you want to mount your VPN-1 Edge appliance.
2. Decide on the mounting orientation.
You can mount the appliance on the wall facing up, down, left, or right.

32 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Wall Mounting the Appliance

Note: Mounting the appliance facing downwards is not recommended, as dust might
accumulate in unused ports.

3. Mark two drill holes on the wall, in accordance with the following sketch:

4. Drill two 3.5 mm diameter holes, approximately 25 mm deep.


5. Insert two plastic conical anchors into the holes.

Note: The conical anchors you received with your VPN-1 Edge appliance are
suitable for concrete walls. If you want to mount the appliance on a plaster wall, you
must use anchors that are suitable for plaster walls.

6. Insert the two screws you received with your VPN-1 Edge appliance into the
plastic conical anchors, and turn them until they protrude approximately 5 mm
from the wall.

Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance 33


Securing the Appliance against Theft

7. Align the holes on the VPN-1 Edge appliance's underside with the screws on the
wall, then push the appliance in and down.
Your VPN-1 Edge appliance is wall mounted. You can now connect it to your
computer. See Network Installation on page 37.

Securing the Appliance against Theft

The VPN-1 Edge W series features a security slot to the rear of the right panel,
which enables you to secure your appliance against theft, using an anti-theft
security device.

Note: Anti-theft security devices are available at most computer hardware stores.

This procedure explains how to install a looped security cable on your appliance. A
looped security cable typically includes the parts shown in the diagram below.

Figure 5: Looped Security Cable

34 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Securing the Appliance against Theft

While these parts may differ between devices, all looped security cables include a
bolt with knobs, as shown in the diagram below:

Figure 6: Looped Security Cable Bolt


The bolt has two states, Open and Closed, and is used to connect the looped
security cable to the appliance's security slot.

To install an anti-theft device on the VPN-1 Edge appliance


1. If your anti-theft device has a combination lock, set the desired code, as
described in the documentation that came with your device.
2. Connect the anti-theft device's loop to any sturdy mounting point, as described
in the documentation that came with your device.
3. Slide the anti-theft device's bolt to the Open position.

Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance 35


Securing the Appliance against Theft

4. Insert the bolt into the VPN-1 Edge appliance's security slot, then slide the bolt
to the Closed position until the the bolts holes are aligned.

5. Thread the anti-theft device's pin through the bolt’s holes, and insert the pin into
the main body of the anti-theft device, as described in the documentation that
came with your device.

36 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Network Installation

Network Installation
1. Verify that you have the correct cable type.
For information, see Network Requirements.
2. Connect the LAN cable:
• Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to one of the LAN ports at the back
of the unit.
• Connect the other end to PCs, hubs, or other network devices.
3. Connect the WAN cable:
• Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the WAN port at the back of the
unit.
• Connect the other end of the cable to a Cable Modem, xDSL modem or
office network.
4. Connect the power adapter to the power socket, labeled PWR, at the back of the
VPN-1 Edge appliance.
5. Plug the power adapter into the wall electrical outlet.

Warning: The VPN-1 Edge appliance power adapter is compatible with either 100,
120 or 230 VAC input power. Verify that the wall outlet voltage is compatible with
the voltage specified on your power adapter. Failure to observe this warning may
result in injuries or damage to equipment.

Figure 7: Typical Connection Diagram

Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance 37


Setting Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

6. In wireless models, prepare the VPN-1 Edge appliance for a wireless


connection:
a. Connect the antennas that came with your VPN-1 Edge appliance to
the ANT1 and ANT2 antenna connectors in the appliance's rear panel.
b. Bend the antennas at the hinges, so that they point upwards.
7. In models with a print server, you can connect network printers as follows:
a. Connect one end of a USB cable to a USB port at the back of the unit.
If needed, you can use the provided USB extension cord.
b. Connect the other end to a printer or a USB 2.0 hub.
Warning: Verify that the USB devices' power requirement does not exceed the
appliance's USB power supply capabilities. Failure to observe this warning may
cause damage to the appliance and void the warranty.

For information on setting up network printers, see Setting up Network Printers on


page 438.

Setting Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

After you have installed the VPN-1 Edge appliance, you must set it up using the
steps shown below.
When setting up your VPN-1 Edge appliance for the first time after installation,
these steps follow each other automatically. After you have logged on and set up
your password, the VPN-1 Edge Setup Wizard automatically opens and displays
the dialog boxes for configuring your Internet connection. After you have
configured your Internet connection, the Setup Wizard automatically displays the
dialog boxes for registering your VPN-1 Edge appliance. If desired, you can exit
the Setup Wizard and perform each of these steps separately.

38 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Setting Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

Logging on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal and setting up your password


Initial Login to the VPN-1 Edge Portal on page 41

Configuring an Internet connection


Using the Internet Wizard on page 56

Setting the Time on your VPN-1 Edge appliance


Setting the Time on the Appliance on page 411

Setting up a wireless network


(W only)
Configuring a Wireless Network on page 163

Installing the Product Key


Upgrading Your Software Product on page 393

Registering your VPN-1 Edge appliance


Registering Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance on page 397

Setting up subscription services


Connecting to a Service Center on page 288

You can access the Setup Wizard at any time after initial setup, using the procedure
below.

Chapter 2: Installing and Setting up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance 39


Setting Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

To access the Setup Wizard


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
The Firmware page appears.

2. Click VPN-1 Edge Setup Wizard.


The VPN-1 Edge Setup Wizard opens with the Welcome page displayed.

40 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Initial Login to the VPN-1 Edge Portal

Chapter 3

Getting Started
This chapter contains all the information you need in order to get started using your
VPN-1 Edge appliance.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Initial Login to the VPN-1 Edge Portal ......................................................41
Logging on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal........................................................44
Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely Using HTTPS......................46
Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal.....................................................................48
Logging off.................................................................................................53

Initial Login to the VPN-1 Edge Portal

The first time you log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal, you must set up your
password.

To log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal for the first time


1. Browse to http://my.firewall.

Chapter 3: Getting Started 41


Initial Login to the VPN-1 Edge Portal

The initial login page appears.

2. Type a password both in the Password and the Confirm Password fields.

Note: The password must be five to 25 characters (letters or numbers).

Note: You can change your password at any time. For further information, see
Changing Your Password.

3. Click OK.

42 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Initial Login to the VPN-1 Edge Portal

The VPN-1 Edge Setup Wizard opens, with the Welcome page displayed.

4. Configure your Internet connection using one of the following ways:


• Internet Wizard
The Internet Wizard is the first part of the Setup Wizard, and it takes you
through basic Internet connection setup, step by step. For information on
using the Internet Wizard, see Using the Internet Wizard on page 56.
After you have completed the Internet Wizard, the Setup Wizard continues to
guide you through appliance setup. For more information, see Setting Up the
VPN-1 Edge Appliance.
• Internet Setup
Internet Setup offers advanced setup options, such as configuring two
Internet connections. To use Internet Setup, click Cancel and refer to Using
Internet Setup on page 65.

Chapter 3: Getting Started 43


Logging on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal

Logging on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal

Note: By default, HTTP and HTTPS access to the VPN-1 Edge Portal is not allowed
from the WLAN, unless you do one of the following:

• Configure a specific firewall rule to allow access from the WLAN. See
Using Rules on page 212.
Or
• Enable HTTPS access from the Internet. See Configuring HTTPS on
page 404.

To log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal


1. Do one of the following:
• Browse to http://my.firewall.
Or
• To log on through HTTPS (locally or remotely), follow the procedure
Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely on page 46.

44 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Logging on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal

The login page appears.

2. Type your username and password.


3. Click OK.

Chapter 3: Getting Started 45


Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely Using HTTPS

The Welcome page appears.

Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely Using


HTTPS

You can access the VPN-1 Edge Portal remotely (from the Internet) through
HTTPS. HTTPS is a protocol for accessing a secure Web server. It is used to
transfer confidential user information. If desired, you can also use HTTPS to access
the VPN-1 Edge Portal from your internal network.

Note: In order to access the VPN-1 Edge Portal remotely using HTTPS, you must
first do both of the following:

• Configure your password, using HTTP. See Initial Login to the VPN-1
Edge Portal on page 41.
• Configure HTTPS Remote Access. See Configuring HTTPS on page
404.

46 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely Using HTTPS

Note: Your browser must support 128-bit cipher strength. To check your browser's
cipher strength, open Internet Explorer and click Help > About Internet Explorer.

To access the VPN-1 Edge Portal from your internal network

• Browse to https://my.firewall.
(Note that the URL starts with “https”, not “http”.)
The VPN-1 Edge Portal appears.

To access the VPN-1 Edge Portal from the Internet

• Browse to https://<firewall_IP_address>:981.
(Note that the URL starts with “https”, not “http”.)
The following things happen in the order below:
If this is your first attempt to access the VPN-1 Edge Portal through HTTPS, the
certificate in the VPN-1 Edge appliance is not yet known to the browser, so the
Security Alert dialog box appears.
To avoid seeing this dialog box again, install the certificate of the destination
VPN-1 Edge appliance. If you are using Internet Explorer 5, do the following:
a. Click View Certificate.
The Certificate dialog box appears, with the General tab displayed.
b. Click Install Certificate.
The Certificate Import Wizard opens.
c. Click Next.
d. Click Next.
e. Click Finish.
f. Click Yes.
g. Click OK.

Chapter 3: Getting Started 47


Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal

The Security Alert dialog box reappears.


h. Click Yes.
The VPN-1 Edge Portal appears.

Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal


The VPN-1 Edge Portal is a Web-based management interface, which enables you
to manage and configure the VPN-1 Edge appliance operation and options.
The VPN-1 Edge Portal consists of three major elements.

Table 5: VPN-1 Edge Portal Elements

Element Description

Main menu Used for navigating between the various topics (such as Reports, Security,
and Setup).

Main frame Displays information and controls related to the selected topic. The main
frame may also contain tabs that allow you to view different pages related to
the selected topic.

Status bar Shows your Internet connection and managed services status.

48 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal

Figure 8: VPN-1 Edge Portal

Main Menu
The main menu includes the following submenus.

Table 6: Main Menu Submenus

This Does this…


submenu…

Welcome Displays general welcome information.

Reports Provides reporting capabilities in terms of event logging, traffic


monitoring, active computers, and established connections.

Security Provides controls and options for setting the security of any computer in
the network.

Antivirus Allows you to configure VStream Antivirus settings.

Services Allows you to control your subscription to subscription services.

Chapter 3: Getting Started 49


Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal

This Does this…


submenu…

Network Allows you to manage and configure your network settings and Internet
connections.

Setup Provides a set of tools for managing your VPN-1 Edge appliance. Allows
you to upgrade your license and firmware and to configure HTTPS
access to your VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Users Allows you to manage VPN-1 Edge appliance users.

VPN Allows you to manage, configure, and log on to VPN sites.

Help Provides context-sensitive help.

Logout Allows you to log off of the VPN-1 Edge Portal.

Main Frame
The main frame displays the relevant data and controls pertaining to the menu and
tab you select. These elements sometimes differ depending on what model you are
using. The differences are described throughout this guide.

Status Bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of each page. It displays the fields below, as
well as the date and time.

50 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal

Table 7: Status Bar Fields

This field… Displays this…

Internet Your Internet connection status.

The connection status may be one of the following:

• Connected. The VPN-1 Edge appliance is connected to the Internet.


• Connected – Probing OK. Connection probing is enabled and has
detected that the Internet connectivity is OK.
• Connected – Probing Failed. Connection probing is enabled and has
detected problems with the Internet connectivity.
• Not Connected. The Internet connection is down.
• Establishing Connection. The VPN-1 Edge appliance is connecting to
the Internet.
• Contacting Gateway. The VPN-1 Edge appliance is trying to contact
the Internet default gateway.
• Disabled. The Internet connection has been manually disabled.

Note: You can configure both a primary and a secondary Internet connection.
When both connections are configured, the Status bar displays both statuses.
For example “Internet [Primary]: Connected”. For information on configuring a
secondary Internet connection, see Configuring the Internet Connection on
page 55.

Chapter 3: Getting Started 51


Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal

This field… Displays this…

Service Displays your subscription services status.


Center
Your Service Center may offer various subscription services. These include
the firewall service and optional services such as Web Filtering and Email
Antivirus.

Your subscription services status may be one of the following:

• Not Subscribed. You are not subscribed to security services.


• Connection Failed. The VPN-1 Edge appliance failed to connect to
the Service Center.
• Connecting. The VPN-1 Edge appliance is connecting to the
Service Center.
• Connected. You are connected to the Service Center, and security
services are active.

52 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Logging off

Logging off

Logging off terminates your administration session. Any subsequent attempt to


connect to the VPN-1 Edge Portal will require re-entering of the administration
password.

To log off of the VPN-1 Edge Portal

• Do one of the following:


• If you are connected through HTTP, click Logout in the main menu.
The Logout page appears.

• If you are connected through HTTPS, the Logout option does not appear
in the main menu. Close the browser window.

Chapter 3: Getting Started 53


Overview

Chapter 4

Configuring the Internet Connection


This chapter describes how to configure and work with an VPN-1 Edge Internet
connection.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Overview ....................................................................................................55
Using the Internet Wizard ..........................................................................56
Using Internet Setup ...................................................................................65
Setting Up a Dialup Modem.......................................................................85
Viewing Internet Connection Information..................................................88
Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection...............................................90
Using Quick Internet Connection/Disconnection .......................................92
Configuring a Backup Internet Connection ................................................92

Overview
You must configure your Internet connection before you can access the Internet
through the VPN-1 Edge appliance. You can configure your Internet connection
using any of the following setup tools:
• Setup Wizard. Guides you through the VPN-1 Edge appliance setup step by
step. The first part of the Setup Wizard is the Internet Wizard. For further
information on the Setup Wizard, see Setting Up the VPN-1 Edge
Appliance.
• Internet Wizard. Guides you through the Internet connection configuration
process step by step.
• Internet Setup. Offers advanced setup options. If you are using VPN-1
Edge X or W, you can do any of the following:
• Configure two Internet connections.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 55


Using the Internet Wizard

• Enable Traffic Shaper for traffic flowing through the connection.


For information on Traffic Shaper, see Using Traffic Shaper.
• Configure a dialup connection as a backup Internet connection.
Before configuring the connection, you must first set up the modem. For
information, see Setting Up a Dialup Modem on page 85.

Using the Internet Wizard

The Internet Wizard allows you to configure your VPN-1 Edge appliance for
Internet connection quickly and easily through its user-friendly interface. It lets you
to choose between the following three types of broadband connection methods:
• Direct LAN Connection
• Cable Modem
• PPTP or PPPoE dialer

Note: The first time you log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal, the Internet Wizard starts
automatically as part of the Setup Wizard. In this case, you should skip to step 3 in
the procedure below.

To set up the Internet connection using the Internet Wizard


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.
The Internet page appears.
2. Click Internet Wizard.

56 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using the Internet Wizard

The Internet Wizard opens with the Welcome page displayed.

3. Click Next.
The Internet Connection Method dialog box appears.

4. Select the Internet connection method you want to use for connecting to the
Internet.

Note: If you selected PPTP or PPPoE dialer, do not use your dial-up software to
connect to the Internet.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 57


Using the Internet Wizard

5. Click Next.

Using a Direct LAN Connection


No further settings are required for a direct LAN (Local Area Network) connection.
The Confirmation screen appears.

1. Click Next.
The system attempts to connect to the Internet via the selected connection.
The Connecting… screen appears.

58 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using the Internet Wizard

At the end of the connection process the Connected screen appears.

2. Click Finish.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 59


Using the Internet Wizard

Using a Cable Modem Connection


If you selected the Cable Modem connection method, the Identification dialog box
appears.

1. If your ISP requires a specific hostname for authentication, type it in the Host
Name field.
The ISP will supply you with the proper hostname, if required. Most ISPs do not
require a specific hostname.
2. A MAC address is a 12-digit identifier assigned to every network device. If your
ISP restricts connections to specific, recognized MAC addresses, they will
instruct you to enter the MAC address. Otherwise, you may leave this field
blank.
If your ISP requires the MAC address, do either of the following:
• Click This Computer to automatically "clone" the MAC address of your
computer to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
Or
• If the ISP requires authentication using the MAC address of a different
computer, enter the MAC address in the MAC cloning field.
3. Click Next.

60 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using the Internet Wizard

The Confirmation screen appears.


4. Click Next.
The system attempts to connect to the Internet.
The Connecting… screen appears. At the end of the connection process the
Connected screen appears.
5. Click Finish.

Using a PPTP or PPPoE Dialer Connection


If you selected the PPTP or PPPoE dialer connection method, the DSL Connection
Type dialog box appears.

1. Select the connection method used by your DSL provider.

Note: Most xDSL providers use PPPoE. If you are uncertain regarding which
connection method to use contact your xDSL provider.

2. Click Next.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 61


Using the Internet Wizard

Using PPPoE
If you selected the PPPoE connection method, the DSL Configuration dialog box
appears.

1. Complete the fields using the information in the table below.


2. Click Next.
The Confirmation screen appears.
3. Click Next.
The system attempts to connect to the Internet via the DSL connection.
The Connecting… screen appears.
At the end of the connection process the Connected screen appears.
4. Click Finish.

Table 8: PPPoE Connection Fields

In this field… Do this…

Username Type your user name.

62 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using the Internet Wizard

In this field… Do this…

Password Type your password.

Confirm password Type your password again.

Service Type your service name.

This field can be left blank.

Using PPTP
If you selected the PPTP connection method, the DSL Configuration dialog box
appears.

1. Complete the fields using the information in the table below.


2. Click Next.
The Confirmation screen appears.
3. Click Next.
The system attempts to connect to the Internet via the DSL connection.
The Connecting… screen appears.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 63


Using the Internet Wizard

At the end of the connection process the Connected screen appears.


4. Click Finish.

Table 9: PPTP Connection Fields

In this field… Do this…

Username Type your user name.

Password Type your password.

Confirm password Type your password again.

Service Type your service name.

Server IP Type the IP address of the PPTP modem.

Internal IP Type the local IP address required for accessing the PPTP modem.

Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of the PPTP modem.

64 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Internet Setup

Using Internet Setup

Internet Setup allows you to manually configure your Internet connection.

To configure the Internet connection using Internet Setup


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.

2. Next to the desired Internet connection, click Edit.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 65


Using Internet Setup

The Internet Setup page appears.

3. From the Connection Type drop-down list, select the Internet connection type
you are using/intend to use.
The display changes according to the connection type you selected.
The following steps should be performed in accordance with the connection type
you have chosen.

Using a LAN Connection

66 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Internet Setup

1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
page 78.
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.

2. Click Apply.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status
Bar displays the Internet status “Connecting”. This may take several seconds.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 67


Using Internet Setup

Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status
“Connected”.

Using a Cable Modem Connection

1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
page 78.

68 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Internet Setup

New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.

2. Click Apply.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status
Bar displays the Internet status “Connecting”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status
“Connected”.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 69


Using Internet Setup

Using a PPPoE Connection

1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
page 78.

70 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Internet Setup

New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.

2. Click Apply.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status
Bar displays the Internet status “Connecting”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status
“Connected”.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 71


Using Internet Setup

Using a PPTP Connection

1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
page 78.

72 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Internet Setup

New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.

2. Click Apply.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status
Bar displays the Internet status “Connecting”. This may take several seconds.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 73


Using Internet Setup

Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status
“Connected”.

Using a Telstra (BPA) Connection


Use this Internet connection type only if you are subscribed to Telstra® BigPond™
Internet. Telstra BigPond is a trademark of Telstra Corporation Limited.

1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
page 78.

74 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Internet Setup

New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.

2. Click Apply.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status
Bar displays the Internet status “Connecting”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status
“Connected”.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 75


Using Internet Setup

Using a Dialup Connection


To use this connection type, you must first set up the dialup modem. For
information, see Setting Up a Dialup Modem on page 85.

1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
page 78.

76 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Internet Setup

New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.

2. Click Apply.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status
Bar displays the Internet status “Connecting”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status
“Connected”.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 77


Using Internet Setup

Using No Connection
If you do not have an Internet connection, set the connection type to None.

• Click Apply.

Table 10: Internet Setup Fields

In this field… Do this…

Username Type your user name.

Password Type your password.

Confirm password Type your password.

Service Type your service name.

If your ISP has not provided you with a service name, leave this field
empty.

Server IP If you selected PPTP, type the IP address of the PPTP server as given
by your ISP.

If you selected Telstra (BPA), type the IP address of the Telstra


authentication server as given by Telstra.

Phone Number If you selected Dialup, type the phone number that the modem should
dial, as given by your ISP.

78 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Internet Setup

In this field… Do this…

Connect on Select this option if you do not want the dialup modem to be constantly
demand connected to the Internet. The modem will dial a connection only under
certain conditions.

This option is useful when configuring a dialup backup connection. For


information, see Setting Up a Dialup Backup Connection on page 93.

When no higher Select this option to specify that the dialup modem should only dial a
priority connection connection if no other connection exists, and the VPN-1 Edge appliance
is available is not acting as a Backup appliance.

If another connection opens, the dialup modem will disconnect.

For information on configuring the appliance as a Backup or Master, see


Configuring High Availability on page 121.

On outgoing Select this option to specify that the dialup modem should only dial a
activity connection if no other connection exists, and there is outgoing activity
(that is, packets need to be transmitted to the Internet).

If another connection opens, or if the connection times out, the dialup


modem will disconnect.

Idle timeout Type the amount of time (in minutes) that the connection can remain idle.
Once this period of time has elapsed, the dialup modem will disconnect.

Obtain IP address Clear this option if you do not want the VPN-1 Edge appliance to obtain
automatically an IP address automatically using DHCP.
(using DHCP)

IP Address Type the static IP address of your VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Subnet Mask Select the subnet mask that applies to the static IP address of your VPN-
1 Edge appliance.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 79


Using Internet Setup

In this field… Do this…

Default Gateway Type the IP address of your ISP’s default gateway.

Name Servers

Obtain Domain Clear this option if you want the VPN-1 Edge appliance to obtain an IP
Name Servers address automatically using DHCP, but not to automatically configure
automatically DNS servers.

Obtain WINS Clear this option if you want the VPN-1 Edge appliance to obtain an IP
Server address automatically using DHCP, but not to automatically configure the
automatically WINS server.

Primary DNS Type the Primary DNS server IP address.


Server

Secondary DNS Type the Secondary DNS server IP address.


Server

WINS Server Type the WINS server IP address.

QoS

Shape Upstream: Select this option to enable Traffic Shaper for outgoing traffic. Then type
Link Rate a rate (in kilobits/second) slightly lower than your Internet connection's
maximum measured upstream speed in the field provided.

It is recommended to try different rates in order to determine which one


provides the best results.

For information on using Traffic Shaper, see Using Traffic Shaper.

80 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Internet Setup

In this field… Do this…

Shape Select this option to enable Traffic Shaper for incoming traffic. Then type
Downstream: Link a rate (in kilobits/second) slightly lower than your Internet connection's
Rate maximum measured downstream speed in the field provided.

It is recommended to try different rates in order to determine which one


provides the best results.

Note: Traffic Shaper cannot control the number or type of packets it


receives from the Internet; it can only affect the rate of incoming traffic by
dropping received packets. This makes the shaping of inbound traffic
less accurate than the shaping of outbound traffic. It is therefore
recommended to enable traffic shaping for incoming traffic only if
necessary.

For information on using Traffic Shaper, see Using Traffic Shaper.

Advanced

External IP If you selected PPTP, type the IP address of the PPTP client as given by
your ISP.

If you selected PPPoE, this field is optional, and you do not have to fill it
in unless your ISP has instructed you to do so.

MTU This field allows you to control the maximum transmission unit size.

As a general recommendation you should leave this field empty. If


however you wish to modify the default MTU, it is recommended that you
consult with your ISP first and use MTU values between 1300 and 1500.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 81


Using Internet Setup

In this field… Do this…

MAC Cloning A MAC address is a 12-digit identifier assigned to every network device. If
your ISP restricts connections to specific, recognized MAC addresses, you
must select this option to clone a MAC address.

Note: When configuring MAC cloning for the secondary Internet


connection, the DMZ/WAN2 port must be configured as WAN2; otherwise
this field is disabled. For information on configuring ports, see Managing
Ports on page 146.

Hardware MAC This field displays the VPN-1 Edge appliance's MAC address.
Address
This field is read-only.

Cloned MAC Do one of the following:


Address
• Click This Computer to automatically "clone" the MAC address of
your computer to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
• If the ISP requires authentication using the MAC address of a
different computer, type the MAC address in this field.

Note: In the secondary Internet connection, this field is enabled only if the
DMZ/WAN2 port is set to WAN2.

High Availability

Do not connect if If you are using High Availability (HA), select this option to specify that the
this gateway is in gateway should connect to the Internet only if it is the Active Gateway in
passive state the HA cluster.

This field is only enabled if HA is configured.

For information on HA, see Configuring High Availability on page 121.

Dead Connection
Detection

82 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Internet Setup

In this field… Do this…

Probe Next Hop Select this option to automatically detect loss of connectivity to the default
gateway. If you selected LAN, this is done by sending ARP requests to the
default gateway. If you selected PPTP, PPPoE, or Dialup, this is done by
sending PPP echo reply (LCP) messages to the PPP peer.

By default, if the default gateway does not respond, the Internet


connection is considered to be down.

If it is determined that the Internet connection is down, and two Internet


connections are defined, a failover will be performed to the second
Internet connection, ensuring continuous Internet connectivity.

This option is selected by default.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 83


Using Internet Setup

In this field… Do this…

Connection Probing While the Probe Next Hop option checks the availability of the next hop
Method router, which is usually at your ISP, connectivity to the next hop router
does not always indicate that the Internet is accessible. For example, if
there is a problem with a different router at the ISP, the next hop will be
reachable, but the Internet might be inaccessible. Connection probing is a
way to detect Internet failures that are more than one hop away.

Specify what method to use for probing the connection, by selecting one
of the following:

• None. Do not perform Internet connection probing. Next hop


probing will still be used, if the Probe Next Hop check box is
selected. This is the default value.
• Ping Addresses. Ping anywhere from one to three servers
specified by IP address or DNS name in the 1, 2, and 3 fields. If
for 45 seconds none of the defined servers respond to pinging,
the Internet connection is considered to be down.
Use this method if you have reliable servers that can be
pinged, that are a good indicator of Internet connectivity, and
that are not likely to fail simultaneously (that is, they are not at
the same location).
• Probe DNS Servers. Probe the primary and secondary DNS
servers. If for 45 seconds neither gateway responds, the
Internet connection is considered to be down.
Use this method if the availability of your DNS servers is a
good indicator for the availability of Internet connectivity.
• Probe VPN Gateway (RDP). Send RDP echo requests to up to
three Check Point VPN gateways specified by IP address or
DNS name in the 1, 2, and 3 fields. If for 45 seconds none of
the defined gateways respond, the Internet connection is
considered to be down.
Use this option if you have Check Point VPN gateways, and
you want loss of connectivity to these gateways to trigger ISP
failover to an Internet connection from which these gateways
are reachable.

84 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Setting Up a Dialup Modem

In this field… Do this…

1, 2, 3 If you chose the Ping Addresses connection probing method, type the IP
addresses or DNS names of the desired servers.

If you chose the Probe VPN Gateway (RDP) connection probing method, type
the IP addresses or DNS names of the desired VPN gateways.

You can clear a field by clicking Clear.

Setting Up a Dialup Modem

You can use a dialup modem as a primary or secondary Internet connection


method. This is useful in locations where broadband Internet access is unavailable.
When used as a backup Internet connection, the modem can be automatically
disconnected when not in use. For information on setting up a dialup backup
connection, see Setting Up a Dialup Backup Connection on page 93.

To set up a dialup modem


1. Connect a regular or ISDN dialup modem to your VPN-1 Edge appliance's serial
port.
For information on locating the serial port, see Rear Panel on page 8.
2. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 85


Setting Up a Dialup Modem

The Ports page appears.

3. In the RS232 drop-down list, select Dialup.


4. Click Apply.
5. Next to the RS232 drop-down list, click Setup.

86 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Setting Up a Dialup Modem

The Dialup page appears.

6. Complete the fields using the information in the table below.


7. Click Apply.
8. To check that that the values you entered are correct, click Test.
The Dialup page displays a message indicating whether the test succeeded.
9. Configure a Dialup Internet connection using the information in Using Internet
Setup on page 65.

Table 11: Dialup Fields

In this field… Do this…

Modem Type Select the modem type.

If you selected Custom, the Installation String field is enabled. Otherwise,


it is filled in with the correct installation string for the modem type.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 87


Viewing Internet Connection Information

In this field… Do this…

Initialization String Type the installation string for the custom modem type.

If you selected a standard modem type, this field is read-only.

Dial Mode Select the dial mode the modem uses.

Port Speed Select the modem's port speed (in bits per second).

Viewing Internet Connection Information

You can view information on your Internet connection(s) in terms of status,


duration, and activity.

To view Internet connection information


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.

88 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing Internet Connection Information

The Internet page appears.

For an explanation of the fields on this page, see the table below.
2. To refresh the information on this page, click Refresh.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 89


Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection

Table 12: Internet Page Fields

Field Description

Status Indicates the connection’s status.

Duration Indicates the connection duration, if active. The duration is given in the
format hh:mm:ss, where:

hh=hours

mm=minutes

ss=seconds

IP Address Your IP address.

Enabled Indicates whether or not the connection is enabled.

For further information, see Enabling/Disabling the Internet


Connection on page 90

Received Packets The number of data packets received in the active connection.

Sent Packets The number of data packets sent in the active connection.

Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection

You can temporarily disable an Internet connection. This is useful if, for example,
you are going on vacation and do not want to leave your computer connected to the
Internet. If you have two Internet connections, you can force the VPN-1 Edge
appliance to use a particular connection, by disabling the other connection.
The Internet connection’s Enabled/Disabled status is persistent through VPN-1
Edge appliance reboots.

90 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection

To enable/disable an Internet connection


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.
The Internet page appears.
2. Next to the Internet connection, do one of the following:
• To enable the connection, click .
The button changes to and the connection is enabled.
• To disable the connection, click .
The button changes to and the connection is disabled.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 91


Using Quick Internet Connection/Disconnection

Using Quick Internet Connection/Disconnection

By clicking the Connect or Disconnect button (depending on the connection status)


on the Internet page, you can establish a quick Internet connection using the
currently-selected connection type. In the same manner, you can terminate the
active connection.
The Internet connection retains its Connected/Not Connected status until the VPN-
1 Edge appliance is rebooted. The VPN-1 Edge appliance then connects to the
Internet if the connection is enabled. For information on enabling an Internet
connection, see Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection on page 90.

Configuring a Backup Internet Connection


You can configure both a primary and a secondary Internet connection. The
secondary connection acts as a backup, so that if the primary connection fails, the
VPN-1 Edge appliance remains connected to the Internet.

Note: You can configure different DNS servers for the primary and secondary
connections. The VPN-1 Edge appliance acts as a DNS relay and routes requests
from computers within the network to the appropriate DNS server for the active
Internet connection.

Setting Up a LAN or Broadband Backup Connection


Using the VPN-1 Edge Appliance's WAN Port

To set up a LAN or broadband backup Internet connection


1. Connect a hub or switch to the WAN port on your appliance's rear panel.
2. Connect your two modems or routers to the hub/switch.

92 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring a Backup Internet Connection

3. Configure two Internet connections.


For instructions, see Using Internet Setup on page 65.

Important: The two connections can be of different types. However, they cannot both
be LAN DHCP connections.

Using the VPN-1 Edge Appliance's DMZ/WAN2 Port

To set up a LAN or broadband backup Internet connection


1. Connect a modem to the DMZ/WAN2 port on your appliance's rear panel.
2. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The Ports page appears.
3. In the DMZ/WAN2 drop-down list, select WAN2.
4. Click Apply.
5. Configure two Internet connections.
For instructions, see Using Internet Setup on page 65.

Setting Up a Dialup Backup Connection

If desired, you can use a dialup modem as the secondary Internet connection
method. The VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically dials the modem if the primary
Internet connection fails.

To set up a dialup backup Internet connection


1. Setup a dialup modem.
For instructions, see Setting Up a Dialup Modem on page 85.

Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 93


Configuring a Backup Internet Connection

2. Configure a LAN or broadband primary Internet connection.


For instructions, see Using Internet Setup on page 65.
3. Configure a Dialup secondary Internet connection.
For instructions, see Using Internet Setup on page 65.

94 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

Chapter 5

Managing Your Network


This chapter describes how to manage and configure your network connection and
settings.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Configuring Network Settings....................................................................95
Configuring High Availability..................................................................121
Using Static Routes ..................................................................................140
Managing Ports.........................................................................................146

Configuring Network Settings


Warning: These are advanced settings. Do not change them unless it is necessary
and you are qualified to do so.

Note: If you change the network settings to incorrect values and are unable to
correct the error, you can reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance to its default settings.
See Resetting the VPN-1 Edge appliance to Defaults on page 432.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 95


Configuring Network Settings

Configuring a DHCP Server

By default, the VPN-1 Edge appliance operates as a DHCP (Dynamic Host


Configuration Protocol) server. This allows the VPN-1 Edge appliance to
automatically configure all the devices on your network with their network
configuration details.

Note: The DHCP server only serves computers that are configured to obtain an IP
address automatically. If a computer is not configured to obtain an IP address
automatically, it is recommended to assign it an IP address outside of the DHCP
address range. If you do assign it an IP address within the DHCP address range,
the DHCP server will not assign this IP address to another computer.

If you already have a DHCP server in your internal network, and you want to use it
instead of the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server, you must disable the VPN-1 Edge DHCP
server, since you cannot have two DHCP servers or relays on the same network
segment.
If you want to use a DHCP server on the Internet or via a VPN, instead of the
VPN-1 Edge DHCP server, you can configure DHCP relay. When in DHCP relay
mode, the VPN-1 Edge appliance relays information from the desired DHCP server
to the devices on your network.

Note: You can perform DHCP reservation using network objects. For information,
see Using Network Objects on page 130.

96 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

Enabling/Disabling the VPN-1 Edge DHCP Server

You can enable and disable the VPN-1 Edge DHCP Server for internal networks.

Note: Enabling and disabling the DHCP Server is not available for the OfficeMode
network.

To enable/disable the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.

2. In the desired network's row, click Edit.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 97


Configuring Network Settings

The Edit Network Settings page appears.

3. From the DHCP Server list, select Enabled or Disabled.


4. Click Apply.
A warning message appears.
5. Click OK.
A success message appears
6. If your computer is configured to obtain its IP address automatically (using
DHCP), and either the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server or another DHCP server is
enabled, restart your computer.
If you enabled the DHCP server, your computer obtains an IP address in the
DHCP address range.

98 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

Configuring the DHCP Address Range

By default, the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server automatically sets the DHCP address
range. The DHCP address range is the range of IP addresses that the DHCP server
can assign to network devices. IP addresses outside of the DHCP address range are
reserved for statically addressed computers.
If desired, you can set the VPN-1 Edge DHCP range manually.

Note: Setting the DHCP range manually is not available for the OfficeMode network.

To configure the DHCP address range


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.
2. In the desired network's row, click Edit.
The Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. To set the DHCP range manually:
a. Clear the Automatic DHCP range check box.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 99


Configuring Network Settings

The DHCP IP range fields appear.

b. In the DHCP IP range fields, type the desired DHCP range.


4. To allow the DHCP server to set the IP address range, select the Automatic
DHCP range check box.
5. Click Apply.
A warning message appears.
6. Click OK.
A success message appears
7. If your computer is configured to obtain its IP address automatically (using
DHCP), and either the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server or another DHCP server is
enabled, restart your computer.
Your computer obtains an IP address in the new DHCP address range.

100 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

Configuring DHCP Relay

You can configure DHCP relay for internal networks.

Note: DHCP relay will not work if the appliance is located behind a NAT device.

Note: Configuring DHCP options is not available for the OfficeMode network.

To configure DHCP relay


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.
2. In the desired network's row, click Edit.
The Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. In the DHCP Server list, select Relay.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 101


Configuring Network Settings

The Automatic DHCP range check box is disabled, and the Relay to IP field
appears.

4. In the Relay to IP field, type the IP address of the desired DHCP server.
5. Click Apply.
A warning message appears.
6. Click OK.
A success message appears
7. If your computer is configured to obtain its IP address automatically (using
DHCP), and either the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server or another DHCP server is
enabled, restart your computer.
Your computer obtains an IP address in the DHCP address range.

102 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

Configuring DHCP Server Options

If desired, you can configure the following custom DHCP options for an internal
network:
• Domain suffix
• DNS servers
• WINS servers
• NTP servers
• VoIP call managers
• TFTP server and boot filename

Note: Configuring DHCP options is not available for the DMZ or VLANs.

To configure DHCP options


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.
2. In the desired network's row, click Edit.
The Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. In the DHCP area, click Options.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 103


Configuring Network Settings

The DHCP Server Options page appears.

4. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the table below.

104 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.

5. Click Apply.
6. If your computer is configured to obtain its IP address automatically (using
DHCP), restart your computer.
Your computer obtains an IP address in the DHCP address range.

Table 13: DHCP Server Options Fields

In this field… Do this…

Domain Name Type a default domain suffix that should be passed to DHCP clients.

The DHCP client will automatically append the domain suffix for the
resolving of non-fully qualified names. For example, if the domain suffix
is set to "mydomain.com", and the client tries to resolve the name
“mail”, the suffix will be automatically appended to the name, resulting
in “mail.mydomain.com”.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 105


Configuring Network Settings

In this field… Do this…

Name Servers

Automatically assign Clear this option if you do not want the gateway to act as a DNS relay
DNS server server and pass its own IP address to DHCP clients.
(recommended)
Normally, it is recommended to leave this option selected.

The DNS Server 1 and DNS Server 2 fields appear.

DNS Server 1, 2 Type the IP addresses of the Primary and Secondary DNS servers to
pass to DHCP clients instead of the gateway.

Automatically assign Clear this option if you do not want DHCP clients to be assigned the
WINS server same WINS servers as specified by the Internet connection
configuration (in the Internet Setup page).

The WINS Server 1 and WINS Server 2 fields appear.

WINS Server 1, 2 Type the IP addresses of the Primary and Secondary WINS servers to
use instead of the gateway.

Other Services These fields are not available for the OfficeMode network.

Time Server 1, 2 To use Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers to synchronize the time
on the DHCP clients, type the IP address of the Primary and
Secondary NTP servers.

Call Manager 1, 2 To assign Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) call managers to the
DHCP clients, type the IP address of the Primary and Secondary VoIP
servers.

106 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

In this field… Do this…

TFTP Server Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) enables booting diskless
computers over the network.

To assign a TFTP server to the DHCP clients, type the IP address of


the TFTP server.

TFTP Boot File Type the boot file to use for booting DHCP clients via TFTP.

Changing IP Addresses

If desired, you can change your VPN-1 Edge appliance’s internal IP address, or the
entire range of IP addresses in your internal network. You may want to perform
these tasks if, for example, you are adding the VPN-1 Edge appliance to a large
existing network and don't want to change that network’s IP address range, or if
you are using a DHCP server other than the VPN-1 Edge appliance, that assigns
addresses within a different range.

To change IP addresses
1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.
2. In the LAN network's row, click Edit.
The Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. To change the VPN-1 Edge appliance’s internal IP address, enter the new IP
address in the IP Address field.
4. To change the internal network range, enter a new value in the Subnet Mask
field.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 107


Configuring Network Settings

Note: The internal network range is defined both by the VPN-1 Edge appliance’s
internal IP address and by the subnet mask.

For example, if the VPN-1 Edge appliance’s internal IP address is 192.168.100.7,


and you set the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0, the network’s IP address range will
be 192.168.100.1 – 192.168.100.254.

The default internal network range is 192.168.10.*.

5. Click Apply.
A warning message appears.
6. Click OK.
• The VPN-1 Edge appliance's internal IP address and/or the internal
network range are changed.
• A success message appears.
7. Do one of the following:
• If your computer is configured to obtain its IP address automatically
(using DHCP), and the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server is enabled, restart your
computer.
Your computer obtains an IP address in the new range.
• Otherwise, manually reconfigure your computer to use the new
address range using the TCP/IP settings. For information on configuring
TCP/IP, see TCP/IP Settings on page 26, on page 22.

Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT

Hide Network Address Translation (Hide NAT) enables you to share a single
public Internet IP address among several computers, by “hiding” the private IP
addresses of the internal computers behind the VPN-1 Edge appliance’s single
Internet IP address.

108 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

Note: If Hide NAT is disabled, you must obtain a range of Internet IP addresses
from your ISP. Hide NAT is enabled by default.

Note: Static NAT and Hide NAT can be used together.

To enable/disable Hide NAT


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.
2. In the desired network's row, click Edit.
The Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. From the Hide NAT list, select Enabled or Disabled.
4. Click Apply.
A warning message appears.
5. Click OK.
• If you chose to disable Hide NAT, it is disabled.
• If you chose to enable Hide NAT, it is enabled.

Configuring a DMZ Network

In addition to the LAN network, you can define a second internal network called a
DMZ (demilitarized zone) network.
For information on default security policy rules controlling traffic to and from the
DMZ, see Default Security Policy on page 206.

To configure a DMZ network


1. Connect the DMZ computer to the DMZ port.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 109


Configuring Network Settings

If you have more than one computer in the DMZ network, connect a hub or
switch to the DMZ port, and connect the DMZ computers to the hub.
2. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The Ports page appears.

3. In the DMZ drop-down list, select DMZ.


4. Click Apply.
5. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.
6. In the DMZ network's row, click Edit.
The Edit Network Settings page appears.
7. In the Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.
The fields are enabled.

110 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

8. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.


See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 108.
9. If desired, configure a DHCP server.
See Configuring a DHCP Server on page 96.
10. In the IP Address field, type the IP address of the DMZ network's default
gateway.

Note: The DMZ network must not overlap other networks.

11. In the Subnet Mask text box, type the DMZ’s internal network range.
12. Click Apply.
A warning message appears.
13. Click OK.
A success message appears.

Configuring the OfficeMode Network

By default, VPN Clients connect to the VPN Server using an Internet IP address
locally assigned by an ISP. This may lead to the following problems:
• VPN Clients on the same network will be unable to communicate with
each other via the VPN-1 Edge Internal VPN Server. This is because their
IP addresses are on the same subnet, and they therefore attempt to
communicate directly over the local network, instead of through the secure
VPN link.
• Some networking protocols or resources may require the client’s IP
address to be an internal one.
OfficeMode solves these problems by enabling the VPN-1 Edge DHCP Server to
automatically assign a unique local IP address to the VPN client, when the client

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 111


Configuring Network Settings

connects and authenticates. The IP addresses are allocated from a pool called the
OfficeMode network.

Note: OfficeMode requires Check Point SecureClient to be installed on the VPN


clients. It is not supported by Check Point SecuRemote.

When OfficeMode is not supported by the VPN client, traditional mode will be
selected used instead.

To configure the OfficeMode network


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.
2. In the OfficeMode network's row, click Edit.
The Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. In the Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.
The fields are enabled.
4. In the IP Address field, type the IP address to use as the OfficeMode network's
default gateway.

Note: The OfficeMode network must not overlap other networks.

5. In the Subnet Mask text box, type the OfficeMode internal network range.
6. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 108.
7. If desired, configure DHCP options.
See Configuring DHCP Server Options on page 103.
8. Click Apply.
A warning message appears.
9. Click OK.

112 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

A success message appears.

Configuring VLANs

Your VPN-1 Edge appliance allows you partition your network into several virtual
LAN networks (VLANs). A VLAN is a logical network behind the VPN-1 Edge
appliance. Computers in the same VLAN behave as if they were on the same
physical network: traffic flows freely between them, without passing through a
firewall. In contrast, traffic between a VLAN and other networks passes through
the firewall and is subject to the security policy. By default, traffic from a VLAN to
any other internal network (including other VLANs) is blocked. In this way,
defining VLANs can increase security and reduce network congestion.
For example, you can assign each division within your organization to a different
VLAN, regardless of their physical location. The members of a division will be
able to communicate with each other and share resources, and only members who
need to communicate with other divisions will be allowed to do so. Furthermore,
you can easily transfer a member of one division to another division without
rewiring your network, by simply reassigning them to the desired VLAN.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 113


Configuring Network Settings

The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports the following VLAN types:


• Tag-based
In tag-based VLAN you use one of the gateway’s ports as a 802.1Q VLAN
trunk, connecting the appliance to a VLAN-aware switch. Each VLAN behind
the trunk is assigned an identifying number called a “VLAN ID”, also referred
to as a "VLAN tag". All outgoing traffic from a tag-based VLAN contains the
VLAN's tag in the packet headers. Incoming traffic to the VLAN must contain
the VLAN's tag as well, or the packets are dropped. Tagging ensures that traffic
is directed to the correct VLAN.

Figure 9: Tag-based VLAN

114 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

• Port-based
Port-based VLAN allows assigning the appliance's LAN ports to VLANs,
effectively transforming the appliance's four-port switch into up to four firewall-
isolated security zones. You can assign multiple ports to the same VLAN, or
each port to a separate VLAN.

Figure 10: Port-based VLAN


Port-based VLAN does not require an external VLAN-capable switch, and is
therefore simpler to use than tag-based VLAN. However, port-based VLAN is
limited, because the appliance's internal switch has only four ports.
You can define up to ten VLAN networks (port-based and tag-based combined).
For information on the default security policy for VLANs, see Default Security
Policy on page 206.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 115


Configuring Network Settings

Adding and Editing Port-Based VLANs

To add or edit a port-based VLAN


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a VLAN site, click Add VLAN.
• To edit a VLAN site, click Edit in the desired VLAN’s row.
The Edit Network Settings page for VLAN networks appears.

3. In the Network Name field, type a name for the VLAN.


4. In the Type drop-down list, select Port Based VLAN.
The VLAN Tag field disappears.

116 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

5. In the IP Address field, type the IP address of the VLAN network's default
gateway.

Note: The VLAN network must not overlap other networks.

6. In the Subnet Mask field, type the VLAN's internal network range.
7. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 108.
8. If desired, configure a DHCP server.
See Configuring a DHCP Server on page 96.
9. Click Apply.
A warning message appears.
10. Click OK.
A success message appears.
11. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The Ports page appears.
12. In the drop-down list next to the LAN port you want to assign, select the
VLAN network's name.
You can assign more than one port to the VLAN.
13. Click Apply.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 117


Configuring Network Settings

Adding and Editing Tag-Based VLANs

To add or edit a tag-based VLAN


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a VLAN site, click Add VLAN.
• To edit a VLAN site, click Edit in the desired VLAN’s row.
The Edit Network Settings page for VLAN networks appears.
3. In the Network Name field, type a name for the VLAN.
4. In the Type drop-down list, select Tag Based VLAN.
The VLAN Tag field appears.
5. In the VLAN Tag field, type a tag for the VLAN.
This must be an integer between 1 and 4095.
6. In the IP Address field, type the IP address of the VLAN network's default
gateway.

Note: The VLAN network must not overlap other networks.

7. In the Subnet Mask field, type the VLAN's internal network range.
8. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 108.
9. If desired, configure a DHCP server.
See Configuring a DHCP Server on page 96.

118 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Network Settings

10. Click Apply.


A warning message appears.
11. Click OK.
A success message appears.
12. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The Ports page appears.
13. In the DMZ/WAN2 drop-down list, select VLAN Trunk.
14. Click Apply.
The DMZ/WAN2 port now operates as a VLAN Trunk port. In this mode, it will
not accept untagged packets.
15. Configure a VLAN trunk (802.1Q) port on the VLAN-aware switch,
according to the vendor instructions. Define the same VLAN IDs on the switch.
16. Connect the VPN-1 Edge appliance's DMZ/WAN2 port to the VLAN-aware
switch's VLAN trunk port.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 119


Configuring Network Settings

Deleting VLANs

To delete a VLAN
1. If the VLAN is port-based, do the following:
a. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The Ports page appears.
b. Remove all port assignments to the VLAN, by selecting other
networks in the drop-down lists.
c. Click Apply.
2. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.

3. In the desired VLAN’s row, click the Erase icon.


A confirmation message appears.
4. Click OK.
The VLAN is deleted.

120 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring High Availability

Configuring High Availability

You can create a High Availability (HA) cluster consisting of two or more VPN-1
Edge appliances. For example, you can install two VPN-1 Edge appliances on your
network, one acting as the “Master”, the default gateway through which all
network traffic is routed, and one acting as the “Backup”. If the Master fails, the
Backup automatically and transparently takes over all the roles of the Master. This
ensures that your network is consistently protected by a VPN-1 Edge appliance and
connected to the Internet.
The gateways in a HA cluster each have a separate IP address within the local
network. In addition, the gateways share a single virtual IP address, which is the
default gateway address for the local network. Control of the virtual IP address is
passed as follows:
1. Each gateway is assigned a priority, which determines the gateway's role: the
gateway with the highest priority is the Active Gateway and uses the virtual IP
address, and the rest of the gateways are Passive Gateways.
2. The Active Gateway sends periodic signals, or “heartbeats”, to the network via a
synchronization interface.
The synchronization interface can be any internal network existing on both
gateways.
3. If the heartbeat from the Active Gateway stops (indicating that the Active
gateway has failed), the gateway with the highest priority becomes the new
Active Gateway and takes over the virtual IP address.
4. When a gateway that was offline comes back online, or a gateway's priority
changes, the gateway sends a heartbeat notifying the other gateways in the
cluster.
If the gateway's priority is now the highest, it becomes the Active Gateway.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports Internet connection tracking, which means
that each appliance tracks its Internet connection's status and reduces its own

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 121


Configuring High Availability

priority by a user-specified amount, if its Internet connection goes down. If the


Active Gateway's priority drops below another gateway's priority, then the other
gateway becomes the Active Gateway.

Note: You can force a fail-over to a passive VPN-1 Edge appliance. You may want
to do this in order to verify that HA is working properly, or if the active VPN-1 Edge
appliance needs repairs. To force a fail-over, switch off the primary box or
disconnect it from the LAN network.

The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports configuring multiple HA clusters on the same
network segment. To this end, each cluster must be assigned a unique ID number.
When HA is configured, you can specify that only the Active Gateway in the
cluster should connect to the Internet. This is called WAN HA, and it is useful in
the following situations:
• Your Internet subscription cost is based is on connection time, and
therefore having the Passive appliance needlessly connected to the Internet
costs you money.
• You want multiple appliances to share the same static IP address without
creating an IP address conflict.
WAN HA avoids an IP address change, and thereby ensures virtually uninterrupted
access from the Internet to internal servers at your network.
Before configuring HA, the following requirements must be met:

122 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring High Availability

• You must have at least two identical VPN-1 Edge appliances.


• The appliances must have identical firmware versions and firewall rules.
• The appliances' internal networks must be the same.
• The appliances must have different real internal IP addresses, but share the
same virtual IP address.
• The appliances' synchronization interface ports must be connected either
directly, or via a hub or a switch. For example, if the DMZ is the
synchronization interface, then the DMZ/WAN2 ports on the appliances
must be connected to each other.
The synchronization interface need not be dedicated for synchronization only. It
may be shared with an active internal network.
You can configure HA for any internal network, except the OfficeMode network.

Note: You can enable the DHCP server in all VPN-1 Edge appliances. A Passive
Gateway’s DHCP server will start answering DHCP requests only if the Active
Gateway fails.

Configuring High Availability on a Gateway

The following procedure explains how to configure HA on a single gateway. You


must perform this procedure on each VPN-1 Edge appliance that you want to
include in the HA cluster.

To configure HA on a VPN-1 Edge appliance


1. Set the appliance’s internal IP addresses and network range.
Each appliance must have a different internal IP address.
See Changing IP Addresses on page 107.
2. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the High Availability tab.
The High Availability page appears.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 123


Configuring High Availability

3. Select the Gateway High Availability check box.


The fields are enabled.

4. Next to each network for which you want to enable HA, select the HA check
box.
5. In the Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP address.
This can be any unused IP address in the network, and must be the same for all
gateways.
6. Click the Synchronization radio button next to the network you want to use as
the synchronization interface.
You can choose any network listed.

124 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring High Availability

Note: The synchronization interface must be the same for all gateways, and must
always be connected and enabled on all gateways. Otherwise, multiple appliances
may become active, causing unpredictable problems.

7. Complete the fields using the information the table below.


8. Click Apply.
A success message appears.
9. If desired, configure WAN HA for both the primary and secondary Internet
connection.
This setting should be the same for all gateways. For further information, see
Using Internet Setup on page 65.

Table 14: High Availability Page Fields

In this field… Do this…

Priority

My Priority Type the gateway's priority.

This must be an integer between 1 and 255.

Interface Tracking

Internet - Primary Type the amount to reduce the gateway's priority if the primary Internet
connection goes down.

This must be an integer between 0 and 255.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 125


Configuring High Availability

In this field… Do this…

Internet - Secondary Type the amount to reduce the gateway's priority if the secondary
Internet connection goes down.

This must be an integer between 0 and 255.

Note: This value is only relevant if you configured a backup


connection. For information on configuring a backup connection, see
Configuring a Backup Internet Connection on page 92.

LAN1/2/3/4 Type the amount to reduce the gateway's priority if the LAN port's
Ethernet link is lost.

DMZ Type the amount to reduce the gateway's priority if the DMZ / WAN2
port's Ethernet link is lost.

Advanced

Group ID If multiple HA clusters exist on the same network segment, type the ID
number of the cluster to which the gateway should belong.

This must be an integer between 1 and 255.

The default value is 55. If only one HA cluster exists, there is no need
to change this value.

126 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring High Availability

Sample Implementation on Two Gateways

The following procedure illustrates how to configure HA for the following two
VPN-1 Edge gateways, Gateway A and Gateway B:

Table 15: Gateway Details

Gateway A Gateway B

Internal Networks LAN, DMZ LAN, DMZ

Internet Connections Primary and secondary Primary only

LAN Network IP Address 192.169.100.1 192.169.100.2

LAN Network 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0


Subnet Mask

DMZ Network IP Address 192.169.101.1 192.169.101.2

DMZ Network 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0


Subnet Mask

The gateways have two internal networks in common, LAN and DMZ. This means
that you can configure HA for the LAN network, the DMZ network, or both. You
can use either of the networks as the synchronization interface.
The procedure below shows how to configure HA for both the LAN and DMZ
networks. The synchronization interface is the DMZ network, the LAN virtual IP
address is 192.168.100.3, and the DMZ virtual IP address is 192.168.101.3.
Gateway A is the Active Gateway.

To configure HA for Gateway A and Gateway B


1. Connect the LAN port of Gateways A and B to hub 1.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 127


Configuring High Availability

2. Connect the DMZ port of Gateways A and B to hub 2.


3. Connect the LAN network computers of Gateways A and B to hub 1.
4. Connect the DMZ network computers of Gateways A and B to hub 2.
5. Do the following on Gateway A:
a. Set the gateway's internal IP addresses and network range to the
values specified in the table above.
See Changing IP Addresses on page 107.
b. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the High Availability tab.
The High Availability page appears.
c. Select the Gateway High Availability check box.
The Gateway High Availability area is enabled. The LAN and DMZ networks
are listed.
d. Next to LAN, select the HA check box.
e. In the LAN network's Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP
address 192.168.100.3.
f. Next to DMZ, select the HA check box.
g. In the DMZ network's Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP
address 192.168.101.3.
h. Click the Synchronization radio button next to DMZ.
i. In the My Priority field, type "100".
The high priority means that Gateway A will be the Active Gateway.
j. In the Internet - Primary field, type "20".
Gateway A will reduce its priority by 20, if its primary Internet connection
goes down.
k. In the Internet - Secondary field, type "30".

128 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring High Availability

Gateway A will reduce its priority by 30, if its secondary Internet connection
goes down.
l. Click Apply.
A success message appears.
6. Do the following on Gateway B:
a. Set the gateway's internal IP addresses and network range to the
values specified in the table above.
See Changing IP Addresses on page 107.
b. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the High Availability tab.
The High Availability page appears.
c. Select the Gateway High Availability check box.
The Gateway High Availability area is enabled. The LAN and DMZ networks
are listed.
d. Next to LAN, select the HA check box.
e. In the LAN network's Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP
address 192.168.100.3.
f. Next to DMZ, select the HA check box.
g. In the DMZ network's Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP
address 192.168.101.3.
h. Click the Synchronization radio button next to DMZ.
i. In the My Priority field, type "60".
The low priority means that Gateway B will be the Passive Gateway.
j. In the Internet - Primary field, type "20".
Gateway B will reduce its priority by 20, if its Internet connection goes
down.
k. Click Apply.
A success message appears.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 129


Configuring High Availability

Gateway A's priority is 100, and Gateway B's priority is 60. So long as one of
Gateway A's Internet connections is up, Gateway A is the Active Gateway, because
its priority is higher than that of Gateway B.
If both of Gateway A's Internet connections are down, it deducts from its priority
20 (for the primary connection) and 30 (for the secondary connection), reducing its
priority to 50. In this case, Gateway B's priority is the higher priority, and it
becomes the Active Gateway.

You can add individual computers or networks as network objects. This enables
you to configure various settings for the computer or network represented by the
network object.
You can configure the following settings for a network object:
• Static NAT (or One-to-One NAT)
Static NAT allows the mapping of Internet IP addresses or address ranges to
hosts inside the internal network. This is useful if you want a computer in your
private network to have its own Internet IP address. For example, if you have
both a mail server and a Web server in your network, you can map each one to a
separate Internet IP address.
Static NAT rules do not imply any security rules. To allow incoming traffic to a
host for which you defined Static NAT, you must create an Allow rule. When
specifying firewall rules for such hosts, use the host’s internal IP address, and
not the Internet IP address to which the internal IP address is mapped. For
further information, see Using Rules on page 212.

Note: Static NAT and Hide NAT can be used together.

130 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring High Availability

Note: The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports Proxy ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol). When an external source attempts to communicate with such a
computer, the VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically replies to ARP queries with its
own MAC address, thereby enabling communication. As a result, the Static NAT
Internet IP addresses appear to external sources to be real computers connected to
the WAN interface.

• Assign the network object's IP address to a MAC address


Normally, the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server consistently assigns the same IP
address to a specific computer. However, if the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server runs
out of IP addresses and the computer is down, then the DHCP server may
reassign the IP address to a different computer.
If you want to guarantee that a particular computer's IP address remains
constant, you can reserve the IP address for use by the computer's MAC address
only. This is called DHCP reservation, and it is useful if you are hosting a
public Internet server on your network.
• Secure HotSpot enforcement
You can specify whether or not to exclude the network object from HotSpot
enforcement. Excluded network objects will be able to access the network
without viewing the My HotSpot page. For further information on Secure
HotSpot, see Configuring Secure HotSpot on page 261.

Adding and Editing Network Objects

You can add or edit network objects via:


• The Network Objects page
This page enables you to add both individual computers and networks.
• The Active Computers page
This page enables you to add only individual computers as network objects. The
computer's details are filled in automatically in the wizard.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 131


Configuring High Availability

To add or edit a network object via the Network Objects page


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Network Objects tab.
The Network Objects page appears with a list of network objects.

2. Do one of the following:


• To add a network object, click New.
• To edit an existing network object, click Edit next to the desired computer
in the list.

132 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring High Availability

The VPN-1 Edge Network Object Wizard opens, with the Step 1: Network Object
Type dialog box displayed.

3. Do one of the following:


• To specify that the network object should represent a single computer or
device, click Single Computer.
• To specify that the network object should represent a network, click
Network.
4. Click Next.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 133


Configuring High Availability

The Step 2: Computer Details dialog box appears. If you chose Single Computer,
the dialog box includes the Perform Static NAT option.

If you chose Network, the dialog box does not include this option.

5. Complete the fields using the information in the tables below.


6. Click Next.

134 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring High Availability

The Step 3: Save dialog box appears.

7. Type a name for the network object in the field.


8. Click Finish.

To add or edit a network object via the Active Computers page


1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Active Computers tab.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 135


Configuring High Availability

The Active Computers page appears.

If a computer has not yet been added as a network object, the Add button
appears next to it. If a computer has already been added as a network object, the
Edit button appears next to it.
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a network object, click Add next to the desired computer.
• To edit a network object, click Edit next to the desired computer.
The VPN-1 Edge Network Object Wizard opens, with the Step 1: Network Object
Type dialog box displayed.
3. Do one of the following:
• To specify that the network object should represent a single computer or
device, click Single Computer.

136 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring High Availability

• To specify that the network object should represent a network, click


Network.
4. Click Next.
The Step 2: Computer Details dialog box appears.
The computer's IP address and MAC address are automatically filled in.
5. Complete the fields using the information in the tables below.
6. Click Next.
The Step 3: Save dialog box appears with the network object's name. If you are
adding a new network object, this name is the computer's name.
7. To change the network object name, type the desired name in the field.
8. Click Finish.
The new object appears in the Network Objects page.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 137


Configuring High Availability

Table 16: Network Object Fields for a Single Computer

In this field… Do this…

IP Address Type the IP address of the local computer, or click This Computer to
specify your computer.

Reserve a fixed IP Select this option to assign the network object's IP address to a MAC
address for this address, and to allow the network object to connect to the WLAN
computer when MAC Filtering is used. For information about MAC Filtering, see
Configuring a Wireless Network on page 163.

MAC Address Type the MAC address you want to assign to the network object's IP
address, or click This Computer to specify your computer's MAC
address.

Perform Static NAT Select this option to map the local computer's IP address to an
(Network Address Internet IP address.
Translation)
You must then fill in the External IP field.

External IP Type the Internet IP address to which you want to map the local
computer's IP address.

Exclude this computer Select this option to exclude the network object from HotSpot
from HotSpot enforcement.
enforcement

138 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring High Availability

Table 17: Network Object Fields for a Network

In this field… Do this…

IP Range Type the range of local computer IP addresses in the network.

Perform Static NAT Select this option to map the network's IP address range to a range of
(Network Address Internet IP addresses of the same size.
Translation)
You must then fill in the External IP Range field.

External IP Range Type the Internet IP address range to which you want to map the
network's IP address range.

Exclude this network Select this option to exclude this network from HotSpot enforcement.
from HotSpot
enforcement

Viewing and Deleting Network Objects

To view or delete a network object


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Network Objects tab.
The Network Objects page appears with a list of network objects.
2. To delete a network object, do the following:

a. In the desired network object's row, click the Erase icon.


A confirmation message appears.
b. Click OK.
The network object is deleted.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 139


Using Static Routes

Using Static Routes

A static route is a setting that explicitly specifies the route for packets originating
in a certain subnet and/or destined for a certain subnet. Packets with a source and
destination that does not match any defined static route will be routed to the default
gateway. To modify the default gateway, see Using a LAN Connection on page
66.
A static route can be based on the packet's destination IP address, or based on the
source IP address, in which case it is a source route.
Source routing can be used, for example, for load balancing between two Internet
connections. For example, if you have an Accounting department and a Marketing
department, and you want each to use a different Internet connection for outgoing
traffic, you can add a static route specifying that traffic originating from the
Accounting department should be sent via WAN1, and another static route
specifying that traffic originating from the Marketing department should be sent via
WAN2.
The Static Routes page lists all existing routes, including the default, and indicates
whether each route is currently "Up" (reachable) or not.

Adding and Editing Static Routes

To add a static route


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Routes tab.

140 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Static Routes

The Static Routes page appears, with a list of existing static routes.

2. Do one of the following:


• To add a static route, click New Route.
• To edit an existing static route, click Edit next to the desired route in the
list.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 141


Using Static Routes

The Static Route Wizard opens displaying the Step 1: Source and Destination
dialog box.

3. To select a specific source network (source routing), do the following:


a) In the Source drop-down list, select Specified Network.
New fields appear.

b) In the Network field, type the IP address of the source network.

142 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Static Routes

c) In the Netmask drop-down list, select the subnet mask.


4. To select a specific destination network, do the following:
a) In the Destination drop-down list, select Specified Network.
New fields appear.

b) In the Network field, type the IP address of the destination network.


c) In the Netmask drop-down list, select the subnet mask.
5. Click Next.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 143


Using Static Routes

The Step 2: Next Hop and Metric dialog box appears.

6. In the Next Hop IP field, type the IP address of the gateway (next hop router) to
which to route the packets destined for this network.
7. In the Metric field, type the static route's metric.
The gateway sends a packet to the route that matches the packet's destination
and has the lowest metric.
The default value is 10.
8. Click Next.

144 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Static Routes

The new static route is saved.

Viewing and Deleting Static Routes

Note: The “default” route cannot be deleted.

To delete a static route


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Routes tab.
The Static Routes page appears, with a list of existing static routes.

2. In the desired route row, click the Erase icon.


A confirmation message appears.
3. Click OK.
The route is deleted.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 145


Managing Ports

Managing Ports

The VPN-1 Edge appliance enables you to quickly and easily assign its ports to
different uses, as shown in the table below. Furthermore, you can restrict each port
to a specific link speed and duplex setting.

Table 18: Ports and Assignments

You can assign this port... To these uses...

LAN LAN network

VLAN network

DMZ/WAN2 DMZ network

Second WAN connection

VLAN trunk

RS232 Dialup modem

Serial console

146 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Managing Ports

Viewing Port Statuses

You can view the status of the VPN-1 Edge appliance's ports on the Ports page,
including the each Ethernet connection's duplex state. This is useful if you need to
check whether the appliance's physical connections are working, and you can’t see
the LEDs on front of the appliance.

Note: The LAN ports' statuses are displayed only in the VPN-1
Edge W series.

To view port statuses


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The Ports page appears.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 147


Managing Ports

The following information is displayed for each enabled port:


• Assign To. The port's current assignment. For example, if the
DMZ/WAN2 port is currently used for the DMZ, the drop-down list
displays "DMZ".
• Link Configuration. The configured link speed (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps) and
duplex (Full Duplex or Half Duplex) configured for the port.
Automatic Detection indicates that the port is configured to automatically
detect the link speed and duplex.
• Status. The detected link speed and duplex.
No Link indicates that the appliance does not detect anything connected to the
port.
Disabled indicates that the port is disabled. For example, if the DMZ/WAN2
port is currently assigned to the DMZ, but the DMZ is disabled, the port is
marked as such.
2. To refresh the display, click Refresh.

Modifying Port Assignments

You can assign ports to different networks or purposes. Since modifying port
assignments often requires additional configurations, use the table below to
determine which procedure you should use:

Table 19: Modifying Port Assignments

To assign a port See...


to...

LAN The procedure below

148 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Managing Ports

To assign a port See...


to...

VLAN or Configuring VLANs on page 113


VLAN Trunk

WAN2 Setting Up a LAN or Broadband Backup Connection on page 92

DMZ Configuring a DMZ Network

Console Using a Console on page 402

Modem Setting Up a Dialup Modem on page 85

To modify a port assignment


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The Ports page appears.
In the Assigned To drop-down list to the right of the port, select the desired port
assignment.
2. Click Apply.
The port is reassigned to the specified network or purpose.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 149


Managing Ports

Modifying Link Configurations

By default, the VPN-1 Edge automatically detects the link speed and duplex. If
desired, you can manually restrict the VPN-1 Edge appliance's ports to a specific
link speed and duplex.

Note: In the VPN-1 Edge model SBX-166LHG-2, restricting the link speed and
duplex is available for the WAN and DMZ ports, and not for LAN ports 1-4.

To modify a port's link configuration


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The Ports page appears.
2. In the Link Configuration drop-down list to the right of the port, do one of the
following:
• Select the desired link speed and duplex.
• Select Automatic Detection to configure the port to automatically detect
the link speed and duplex.
This is the default.
3. Click Apply.
The port uses the specified link speed and duplex.

Resetting Ports to Defaults

You can reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance's ports to their default link configurations
("Automatic Detection") and default assignments (shown in the table below).

150 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Managing Ports

Table 20: Default Port Assignments

Port Default Assignment

1-4 LAN

DMZ / WAN2 DMZ

WAN This port is always assigned to the WAN.

RS232 Modem

To reset ports to defaults


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The Ports page appears.
2. Click Default.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click OK.
The ports are reset to their default assignments and to "Automatic Detection"
link configuration.
All currently-established connections that are not supported by the default
settings may be broken. For example, if you were using the DMZ/WAN2 port as
WAN2, the port reverts to its DMZ assignment, and the secondary Internet
connection moves to the WAN port.

Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 151


Overview

Chapter 6

Using Traffic Shaper


This chapter describes how to use Traffic Shaper to control the flow of
communication to and from your network.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Overview ..................................................................................................153
Setting Up Traffic Shaper.........................................................................154
Predefined QoS Classes............................................................................155
Adding and Editing Classes......................................................................156
Deleting Classes .......................................................................................161
Restoring Traffic Shaper Defaults ............................................................162

Overview
Traffic Shaper is a bandwidth management solution that allows you to set
bandwidth policies to control the flow of communication. Traffic Shaper ensures
that important traffic takes precedence over less important traffic, so that your
business can continue to function with minimum disruption, despite network
congestion.
Traffic Shaper uses Stateful Inspection technology to access and analyze data
derived from all communication layers. This data is used to classify traffic in up to
eight user-defined Quality of Service (QoS) classes. Traffic Shaper divides
available bandwidth among the classes according to weight. For example, suppose
Web traffic is deemed three times as important as FTP traffic, and these services
are assigned weights of 30 and 10 respectively. If the lines are congested, Traffic
Shaper will maintain the ratio of bandwidth allocated to Web traffic and FTP traffic
at 3:1.
If a specific class is not using all of its bandwidth, the leftover bandwidth is divided
among the remaining classes, in accordance with their relative weights. In the
example above, if only one Web and one FTP connection are active and they are

Chapter 6: Using Traffic Shaper 153


Setting Up Traffic Shaper

competing, the Web connection will receive 75% (30/40) of the leftover
bandwidth, and the FTP connection will receive 25% (10/40) of the leftover
bandwidth. If the Web connection closes, the FTP connection will receive 100% of
the bandwidth.
Traffic Shaper allows you to give a class a bandwidth limit. A class's bandwidth
limit is the maximum amount of bandwidth that connections belonging to that class
may use together. Once a class has reached its bandwidth limit, connections
belonging to that class will not be allocated further bandwidth, even if there is
unused bandwidth available. For example, you can limit all traffic used by Peer-
To-Peer file-sharing applications to a specific rate, such as 512 kilobit per second.
Traffic Shaper also allows you to assign a “Delay Sensitivity” value to a class,
indicating whether connections belonging to the class should be given precedence
over connections belonging to other classes.
Traffic Shaper supports DiffServ (Differentiated Services) Packet Marking.
DiffServ marks packets as belonging to a certain Quality of Service class. These
packets are then granted priority on the public network according to their class.

Setting Up Traffic Shaper

To set up Traffic Shaper


1. Enable Traffic Shaper for the Internet connection.
You can enable Traffic Shaper for incoming or outgoing connections.
See Using Internet Setup on page 65.

Note: Traffic Shaper cannot control the number or type of


packets it receives from the Internet; it can only affect the rate
of incoming traffic by dropping received packets. This makes
the shaping of inbound traffic less accurate than the shaping of
outbound traffic. It is therefore recommended to enable traffic
shaping for incoming traffic only if necessary.

154 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Predefined QoS Classes

2. Define QoS classes that reflect your communication needs. Alternatively, use
the four built-in QoS classes.
See Adding and Editing a Class on page 156.
3. Use Allow or Allow and Forward rules to assign different types of connections
to QoS classes.
For example, if Traffic Shaper is enabled for outgoing traffic, and you create an
Allow rule associating all outgoing VPN traffic with the Urgent QoS class, then
Traffic Shaper will handle outgoing VPN traffic as specified in the bandwidth
policy for the Urgent class.
See Adding and Editing Rules on page 216.

Note: Traffic Shaper must be enabled for the direction of traffic


specified in the rule.

Note: If you do not assign a connection type to a class, Traffic


Shaper automatically assigns the connection type to the built-in
"Default" class.

Predefined QoS Classes

Traffic Shaper provides the following predefined QoS classes.


To assign traffic to these classes, define firewall rules as described in Using Rules
on page 212.

Table 21: Predefined QoS Classes

Class Weight Delay Sensitivity Useful for

Default 10 Medium Normal traffic.


(Normal Traffic)
All traffic is assigned to this class by default.

Chapter 6: Using Traffic Shaper 155


Adding and Editing Classes

Class Weight Delay Sensitivity Useful for

Urgent 15 High Traffic that is highly sensitive to delay. For


(Interactive Traffic) example, IP telephony, videoconferencing,
and interactive protocols that require quick
user response, such as telnet.

Important 20 Medium Normal traffic


(Normal Traffic)

Low Priority 5 Low Traffic that is not sensitive to long delays. For
(Bulk Traffic) example, SMTP traffic (outgoing email).

Adding and Editing Classes

To add or edit a QoS class


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Traffic Shaper tab.

156 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing Classes

The Quality of Service Classes page appears.

2. Click Add.
The VPN-1 Edge QoS Class Editor wizard opens, with the Step 1 of 3: Quality of
Service Parameters dialog box displayed.

3. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the table below.

Chapter 6: Using Traffic Shaper 157


Adding and Editing Classes

4. Click Next.
The Step 2 of 3: Advanced Options dialog box appears.

5. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the table below.

Note: Traffic Shaper may not enforce guaranteed rates and relative weights for
incoming traffic as accurately as for outgoing traffic. This is because Traffic Shaper
cannot control the number or type of packets it receives from the Internet; it can
only affect the rate of incoming traffic by dropping received packets. It is therefore
recommended to enable traffic shaping for incoming traffic only if necessary. For
information on enabling Traffic Shaper for incoming and outgoing traffic, see Using
Internet Setup on page 65.

6. Click Next.

158 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing Classes

The Step 3 of 3: Save dialog box appears with a summary of the class.

7. Type a name for the class.


For example, if you are creating a class for high priority Web connections, you
can name the class "High Priority Web".
8. Click Finish.
The new class appears in the Quality of Service Classes page.

Table 22: QoS Class Fields

In this field… Do this…

Relative Weight Type a value indicating the class's importance relative to the other
defined classes.

For example, if you assign one class a weight of 100, and you assign
another class a weight of 50, the first class will be allocated twice the
amount of bandwidth as the second when the lines are congested.

Chapter 6: Using Traffic Shaper 159


Adding and Editing Classes

In this field… Do this…

Delay Sensitivity Select the degree of precedence to give this class in the transmission
queue:

• Low (Bulk Traffic) - Traffic that is not sensitive to long delays.


For example, SMTP traffic (outgoing email).
• Medium (Normal Traffic) - Normal traffic
• High (Interactive Traffic) - Traffic that is highly sensitive to delay.
For example, IP telephony, videoconferencing, and interactive
protocols that require quick user response, such as telnet.

Traffic Shaper serves delay-sensitive traffic with a lower latency. That is,
Traffic Shaper attempts to send packets with a "High (Interactive Traffic)"
level before packets with a "Medium (Normal Traffic)" or "Low (Bulk
Traffic)" level.

Outgoing Traffic: Select this option to guarantee a minimum bandwidth for outgoing traffic
Guarantee At belonging to this class. Then type the minimum bandwidth (in
Least kilobits/second) in the field provided.

Outgoing Traffic: Select this option to limit the rate of outgoing traffic belonging to this
Limit rate to class. Then type the maximum rate (in kilobits/second) in the field
provided.

Incoming Traffic: Select this option to guarantee a minimum bandwidth for incoming traffic
Guarantee At belonging to this class. Then type the minimum bandwidth (in
Least kilobits/second) in the field provided.

Incoming Traffic: Select this option to limit the rate of incoming traffic belonging to this
Limit rate to class. Then type the maximum rate (in kilobits/second) in the field
provided.

160 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Deleting Classes

In this field… Do this…

DiffServ Code Select this option to mark packets belonging to this class with a DiffServ
Point Code Point (DSCP), which is an integer between 0 and 63. Then type the
DSCP in the field provided.

The marked packets will be given priority on the public network according
to their DSCP.

To use this option, your ISP or private WAN must support DiffServ. You
can obtain the correct DSCP value from your ISP or private WAN
administrator.

Deleting Classes

You cannot delete a class that is currently used by a rule. You can determine
whether a class is in use or not, by viewing the Rules page.

To delete an existing QoS class


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Traffic Shaper tab.
The Quality of Service Classes page appears.
2. Click the Erase icon of the class you wish to delete.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click OK.
The class is deleted.

Chapter 6: Using Traffic Shaper 161


Restoring Traffic Shaper Defaults

Restoring Traffic Shaper Defaults

If desired, you can reset the Traffic Shaper bandwidth policy to use the four
predefined classes, and restore these classes to their default settings. For
information on these classes and their defaults, see Predefined QoS Classes on
page 155.
Note: This will delete any additional classes you defined in Traffic
Shaper and reset all rules to use the Default class.
If one of the additional classes is currently used by a rule, you
cannot reset Traffic Shaper to defaults. You can determine whether
a class is in use or not, by viewing the Rules page.

To restore Traffic Shaper defaults


1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Traffic Shaper tab.
The Quality of Service Classes page appears.
2. Click Restore Defaults.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click OK.

162 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Overview

Chapter 7

Configuring a Wireless Network


This chapter describes how to set up a wireless internal network.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Overview ..................................................................................................163
About the Wireless Hardware in Your VPN-1 Edge W series Appliance 164
Wireless Security Protocols......................................................................165
Manually Configuring a WLAN...............................................................167
Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard................................................178
Preparing the Wireless Stations................................................................184
Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity ...................................................185

Overview
In addition to the LAN and DMZ networks, you can define a wireless internal
network called a WLAN (wireless LAN) network, when using VPN-1 Edge W.
For information on default security policy rules controlling traffic to and from the
WLAN, see Default Security Policy on page 206.
You can configure a WLAN network in either of the following ways:
• Wireless Configuration Wizard. Guides you through the WLAN setup step
by step.
See Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard on page 178.
• Manual configuration. Offers advanced setup options.
See Manually Configuring a WLAN on page 167.

Note: It is recommended to configure the WLAN via Ethernet and not via a wireless
connection, because the wireless connection could be broken after making a
change to the configuration.

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 163


About the Wireless Hardware in Your VPN-1 Edge W series Appliance

About the Wireless Hardware in Your VPN-1 Edge W


series Appliance
Your VPN-1 Edge W series appliance features a built-in 802.11b/g access point
that is tightly integrated with the firewall and hardware-accelerated VPN.
VPN-1 Edge W supports the latest 802.11g standard (up to 54Mbps) and is
backwards compatible with the older 802.11b standard (up to 11Mbps), so that
both new and old adapters of these standards are interoperable. VPN-1 Edge W
also supports a special Super G mode that allows reaching a throughput of up to
108Mbps with Super G compatible stations. For more information on the Super G
mode refer to: http://www.super-ag.com.
VPN-1 Edge W transmits in 2.4GHz range, using dual diversity antennas to
increase the range. In addition, the VPN-1 Edge W supports a special extended
range (XR) mode that allows up to three times the range of a regular 802.11g
access point. XR dramatically stretches the performance of a wireless LAN, by
enabling long-range connections. The architecture delivers receive sensitivities of
up to 105dBm, over 20 dB more than the 802.11 specification. This allows ranges
of up to 300 meters indoors, and up to 1 km (3200 ft) outdoors, with XR-enabled
wireless stations (actual range depends on environment).

164 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Wireless Security Protocols

Wireless Security Protocols


The VPN-1 Edge wireless security appliance supports the following security
protocols:

Table 23: Wireless Security Protocols

Security Description
Protocol

None No security method is used. This option is not recommended, because it


allows unauthorized users to access your WLAN network, although you can
still limit access from the WLAN by creating firewall rules. This method is
suitable for creating public access points.

WEP encryption In the WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption security method, wireless
stations must use a pre-shared key to connect to your network. This method
is not recommended, due to known security flaws in the WEP protocol. It is
provided for compatibility with existing wireless deployments.

Note: The appliance and the wireless stations must be configured with the
same WEP key.

802.1X: RADIUS In the 802.1x security method, wireless stations (supplicants) attempting to
authentication, no connect to the access point (authenticator) must first be authenticated by a
encryption RADIUS server (authentication server) which supports 802.1x . All messages
are passed in EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol).

This method is recommended for situations in which you want to authenticate


wireless users, but do not need to encrypt the data.

Note: To use this security method, you must first configure a RADIUS server.
See Using RADIUS Authentication. on page 380

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 165


Wireless Security Protocols

Security Description
Protocol

WPA: RADIUS The WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) security method uses MIC (message
authentication, integrity check) to ensure the integrity of messages, and TKIP (Temporal Key
encryption Integrity Protocol) to enhance data encryption.

Furthermore, WPA includes 802.1x and EAP authentication, based on a


central RADIUS authentication server. This method is recommended for
situations where you want to authenticate wireless stations using a RADIUS
server, and to encrypt the transmitted data.

Note: To use this security method, you must first configure a RADIUS server
which supports 802.1x. See Using RADIUS Authentication. on page 380

WPA-PSK: The WPA-PSK security method is a variation of WPA that does not require an
password authentication server. WPA-PSK periodically changes and authenticates
authentication, encryption keys. This is called rekeying.
encryption
This option is recommended for small networks, which want to authenticate
and encrypt wireless data, but do not want to install a RADIUS server.

Note: The appliance and the wireless stations must be configured with the
same passphrase.

WPA2 (802.11i) The WPA2 security method uses the more secure Advanced Encryption
Standard (AES) cipher, instead of the RC4 cipher used by WPA and WEP.

When using WPA or WPA-PSK security methods, the VPN-1 Edge enables
you to restrict access to the WLAN network to wireless stations that support
the WPA2 security method. If this setting is not selected, the VPN-1 Edge
appliance allows clients to connect using both WPA and WPA2.

166 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Manually Configuring a WLAN

Note: For increased security, it is recommended to enable the VPN-1 Edge internal
VPN Server for users connecting from your internal networks, and to install
SecuRemote on each computer in the WLAN. This ensures that all connections
from the WLAN to the LAN are encrypted and authenticated. For information, see
Internal VPN Server on page 313 and Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance
as a VPN Server on page 314.

Manually Configuring a WLAN

To manually configure a WLAN network


1. Prepare the appliance for a wireless connection as described in Network
Installation on page 37.
2. If you want to use 802.1X or WPA security mode for the WLAN, configure a
RADIUS server.
For information on security modes, see Basic WLAN Settings Fields on page
170.
For information on configuring RADIUS servers, see Using RADIUS
Authentication on page 380.
3. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.
4. In the WLAN network's row, click Edit.

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 167


Manually Configuring a WLAN

The Edit Network Settings page appears.

5. In the Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.


The fields are enabled.
6. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 108.
7. If desired, configure a DHCP server.
See Configuring a DHCP Server on page 96.

168 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Manually Configuring a WLAN

8. Complete the fields using the information in Basic WLAN Settings Fields on
page 170.
9. To configure advanced settings, click Show Advanced Settings and complete the
fields using the information in Advanced WLAN Settings Fields on page 174.
New fields appear.

10. Click Apply.


A warning message appears, telling you that you are about to change your
network settings.

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 169


Manually Configuring a WLAN

11. Click OK.


A success message appears.
12. Prepare the wireless stations.
See Preparing the Wireless Stations on page 184.

Table 24: WLAN Settings Fields

In this field… Do this…

IP Address Type the IP address of the WLAN network's default gateway.

Note: The WLAN network must not overlap other networks.

Subnet Mask Type the WLAN’s internal network range.

Wireless Settings

Network Name Type the network name (SSID) that identifies your wireless network. This
(SSID) name will be visible to wireless stations passing near your access point,
unless you enable the Hide the Network Name (SSID) option.

It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long and is case-sensitive.

Country Select the country where you are located.

Warning: Choosing an incorrect country may result in the violation of


government regulations.

170 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Manually Configuring a WLAN

In this field… Do this…

Operation Mode Select an operation mode:

• 802.11b (11Mbps). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range and offers a


maximum theoretical rate of 11 Mbps. When using this mode,
only 802.11b stations will be able to connect.
• 802.11g (54 Mbps). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range, and offers a
maximum theoretical rate of 54 Mbps. When using this mode,
only 802.11g stations will be able to connect.
• 802.11b/g (11/54 Mbps). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range, and offers
a maximum theoretical rate of 54 Mbps. When using this mode,
both 802.11b stations and 802.11g stations will be able to
connect.
• 802.11g Super (108 Mbps). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range, and
offers a maximum theoretical rate of 108 Mbps. When using this
mode, only 802.11g Super stations will be able to connect.
• 802.11g Super (11/54/108). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range, and
offers a maximum theoretical rate of 108 Mbps. When using this
mode, 802.11b stations, 802.11g stations, and 802.11g Super
stations will all be able to connect.
Each operation mode indicates a wireless protocol (such as 802.11g
Super), followed by the maximum bandwidth (such as 108 Mbps).

The list of modes is dependent on the selected country.

You can prevent older wireless stations from slowing down your network, by
choosing an operation mode that restricts access to newer wireless
stations.

Note: The actual data transfer speed is usually significantly lower than the
maximum theoretical bandwidth and degrades with distance.

Important: The station wireless cards must support the selected operation
mode. For a list of cards supporting 802.11g Super, refer to
http://www.super-ag.com.

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 171


Manually Configuring a WLAN

In this field… Do this…

Channel Select the radio frequency to use for the wireless connection:

• Automatic. The VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically selects a


channel. This is the default.
• A specific channel. The list of channels is dependent on the
selected country and operation mode.
Note: If there is another wireless network in the vicinity, the two networks
may interfere with one another. To avoid this problem, the networks should
be assigned channels that are at least 25 MHz (5 channels) apart.
Alternatively, you can reduce the transmission power.

Security Select the security protocol to use. For information on the supported
security protocols, see Wireless Security Protocols on page 165.

If you select WEP encryption, the WEP Keys area opens.

If you select WPA, the Require WPA2 (802.11i) field appears.

If you select WPA-PSK, the Passphrase and Require WPA2 (802.11i) fields
appear.

Passphrase Type the passphrase for accessing the network, or click Random to randomly
generate a passphrase.

This must be between 8 and 63 characters. It can contain spaces and


special characters, and is case-sensitive.

For the highest security, choose a long passphrase that is hard to guess, or
use the Random button.

Note: The wireless stations must be configured with this passphrase as well.

172 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Manually Configuring a WLAN

In this field… Do this…

Require WPA2 Specify whether you want to require wireless stations to connect using
(802.11i) WPA2, by selecting one of the following:

• Enable. Only wireless stations using WPA2 can access the


WLAN network.
• Disable. Wireless stations using either WPA or WPA2 can access
the WLAN network. This is the default.
WEP Keys If you selected WEP encryption, you must configure at least one WEP key.
The wireless stations must be configured with the same key, as well.

Key 1, 2, 3, 4 radio Click the radio button next to the WEP key that this gateway should use for
button transmission.

The selected key must be entered in the same key slot (1-4) on the station
devices, but the key need not be selected as the transmit key on the
stations.

Note: You can use all four keys to receive data.

Key 1, 2, 3, 4 Select the WEP key length from the drop-down list.
length
The possible key lengths are:

• 64 Bits. The key length is 10 characters.


• 128 Bits. The key length is 26 characters.
• 152 Bits. The key length is 32 characters.

Note: Some wireless card vendors call these lengths 40/104/128,


respectively.

Note: WEP is generally considered to be insecure, regardless of the


selected key length.

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 173


Manually Configuring a WLAN

In this field… Do this…

Key 1, 2, 3, 4 text Type the WEP key, or click Random to randomly generate a key matching
box the selected length. The key is composed of hexadecimal characters 0-9
and A-F, and is not case-sensitive.

Table 25: Advanced WLAN Settings Fields

In this field… Do this…

Advanced Security

Hide the Network Specify whether you want to hide your network's SSID, by selecting one of
Name (SSID) the following:

• Yes. Hide the SSID.


Only devices to which your SSID is known can connect to your
network.
• No. Do not hide the SSID.
Any device within range can detect your network name using the
wireless network discovery features of some products, such as
Microsoft Windows XP, and attempt to connect to your network.
This is the default.
Note: Hiding the SSID does not provide strong security, because by a
determined attacker can still discover your SSID. Therefore, it is not
recommended to rely on this setting alone for security.

174 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Manually Configuring a WLAN

In this field… Do this…

MAC Address Specify whether you want to enable MAC address filtering, by selecting one
Filtering of the following:

• Yes. Enable MAC address filtering.


Only MAC addresses that you added as network objects can
connect to your network.
For information on network objects, see Using Network
Objects on page 130.
• No. Disable MAC address filtering. This is the default.

Note: MAC address filtering does not provide strong security, since MAC
addresses can be spoofed by a determined attacker. Therefore, it is not
recommended to rely on this setting alone for security.

Wireless Transmitter

Transmission Rate Select the transmission rate:

• Automatic. The VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically selects a


rate. This is the default.
• A specific rate

Transmitter Power Select the transmitter power.

Setting a higher transmitter power increases the access point's range. A


lower power reduces interference with other access points in the vicinity.

The default value is Full. It is not necessary to change this value, unless
there are other access points in the vicinity.

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 175


Manually Configuring a WLAN

In this field… Do this…

Antenna Selection Multipath distortion is caused by the reflection of Radio Frequency (RF)
signals traveling from the transmitter to the receiver along more than one
path. Signals that were reflected by some surface reach the receiver after
non-reflected signals and distort them.

VPN-1 Edge appliances avoid the problems of multipath distortion by using


an antenna diversity system. To provide antenna diversity, each wireless
security appliance has two antennas.

Specify which antenna to use for communicating with wireless stations:

• Automatic. The VPN-1 Edge appliance receives signals through


both antennas and automatically selects the antenna with the
lowest distortion signal to use for communicating. The selection
is made on a per-station basis. This is the default.
• ANT 1. The ANT 1antenna is always used for communicating.
• ANT 2. The ANT 2 antenna is always used for communicating.

Use manual diversity control (ANT 1 or ANT 2), if there is only one antenna
connected to the appliance.

Fragmentation Type the smallest IP packet size (in bytes) that requires that the IP packet
Threshold be split into smaller fragments.

If you are experiencing significant radio interference, set the threshold to a


low value (around 1000), to reduce error penalty and increase overall
throughput.

Otherwise, set the threshold to a high value (around 2000), to reduce


overhead.

The default value is 2346.

176 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Manually Configuring a WLAN

In this field… Do this…

RTS Threshold Type the smallest IP packet size for which a station must send an RTS
(Request To Send) before sending the IP packet.

If multiple wireless stations are in range of the access point, but not in range
of each other, they might send data to the access point simultaneously,
thereby causing data collisions and failures. RTS ensures that the channel
is clear before the each packet is sent.

If your network is congested, and the users are distant from one another,
set the RTS threshold to a low value (around 500).

Setting a value equal to the fragmentation threshold effectively disables


RTS.

The default value is 2346.

Extended Range Specify whether to use Extended Range (XR) mode:


Mode (XR)
• Disabled. XR mode is disabled.
• Enabled. XR mode is enabled. XR will be automatically
negotiated with XR-enabled wireless stations and used as
needed. This is the default.

For more information on XR mode, see About the Wireless Hardware in


Your VPN-1 Edge W Appliance on page 164.

Multimedia QoS Specify whether to use the Wireless Multimedia (WMM) standard to
(WMM) prioritize traffic from WMM-compliant multimedia applications:

• Disabled. WMM is disabled. This is the default.


• Enabled. WMM is enabled. The VPN-1 Edge appliance will
prioritize multimedia traffic according to four access categories
(Voice, Video, Best Effort, and Background). This allows for
smoother streaming of voice and video when using WMM aware
applications.

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 177


Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard

Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard

The Wireless Configuration Wizard provides a quick and simple way of setting up
your basic WLAN parameters for the first time.

To configure a WLAN using the Wireless Configuration Wizard


1. Prepare the appliance for a wireless connection as described in Network
Installation on page 37.
2. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.
3. In the WLAN network's row, click Edit.
The Edit Network Settings page appears.
4. Click Wireless Wizard.
The Wireless Configuration Wizard opens, with the Wireless Configuration dialog
box displayed.

5. Select the Enable wireless networking check box to enable the WLAN.

178 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard

The fields are enabled.


6. Complete the fields using the information in Basic WLAN Settings Fields on
page 170.
7. Click Next.
8. The Wireless Security dialog box appears.

9. Do one of the following:


• Click WPA-PSK to use the WPA-PSK security mode.
WPA-PSK periodically changes and authenticates encryption keys. This is a
recommended security mode for small, private wireless networks, which
want to authenticate and encrypt wireless data but do not want to install a
RADIUS server. Both WPA and the newer, more secure WPA2 (802.11i)
will be accepted.
• Click WEP to use the WEP security mode.
Using WEP, wireless stations must use a pre-shared key to connect to your
network. WEP is widely known to be insecure, and is supported mainly for
compatibility with existing networks and stations that do not support other
methods.

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 179


Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard

• Click No Security to use no security to create a public, unsecured access


point.
Note: You cannot configure WPA and 802.1x using this wizard. For information on
configuring these modes, see Manually Configuring a WLAN on page 167.

10. Click Next.

WPA-PSK
If you chose WPA-PSK, the Wireless Configuration-WPA-PSK dialog box appears.

Do the following:
1. In the text box, type the passphrase for accessing the network, or click Random
to randomly generate a passphrase.
This must be between 8 and 63 characters. It can contain spaces and special
characters, and is case-sensitive.
2. Click Next.

180 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard

The Wireless Security Confirmation dialog box appears.

3. Click Next.
4. The Wireless Security Complete dialog box appears.

5. Click Finish.
The wizard closes.
6. Prepare the wireless stations.
See Preparing the Wireless Stations on page 184.

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 181


Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard

WEP
If you chose WEP, the Wireless Configuration-WEP dialog box appears.

Do the following:
1. Choose a WEP key length.
The possible key lengths are:
• 64 Bits - The key length is 10 hexadecimal characters.
• 128 Bits - The key length is 26 hexadecimal characters.
• 152 Bits - The key length is 32 hexadecimal characters.
Some wireless card vendors call these lengths 40/104/128, respectively.
Note that WEP is generally considered to be insecure, regardless of the selected
key length.
2. In the text box, type the WEP key, or click Random to randomly generate a key
matching the selected length.
The key is composed of characters 0-9 and A-F, and is not case-sensitive. The
wireless stations must be configured with this same key.
3. Click Next.

182 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard

The Wireless Security Confirmation dialog box appears.


4. Click Next.
The Wireless Security Complete dialog box appears.
5. Click Finish.
The wizard closes.
6. Prepare the wireless stations.
See Preparing the Wireless Stations on page 184.

No Security
The Wireless Security Complete dialog box appears.
• Click Finish.
The wizard closes.

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 183


Preparing the Wireless Stations

Preparing the Wireless Stations

After you have configured a WLAN, the wireless stations must be prepared for
connection to the WLAN.

To prepare the wireless stations


1. If you selected the WEP security mode, give the WEP key to the wireless
stations' administrators.
2. If you selected the WPA-PSK security mode, give the passphrase to the wireless
stations' administrator.
3. The wireless stations' administrators should configure the wireless stations and
connect them to the WLAN.
Refer to the wireless cards' documentation for details.

Note: Some wireless cards have "Infrastructure" and "Ad-hoc" modes. These modes
are also called "Access Point" and "Peer to Peer". Choose the "Infrastructure" or
"Access Point" mode.
You can set the wireless cards to either "Long Preamble" or "Short Preamble".

Note: The wireless cards' region and the VPN-1 Edge appliance's region must both
match the region of the world where you are located. If you purchased your VPN-1
Edge appliance in a different region, contact technical support.

184 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity

Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity


I cannot connect to the WLAN from a wireless station. What should I do?
• Check that the SSID configured on the station matches the VPN-1 Edge
appliance's SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive.
• Check that the encryption settings configured on the station (encryption
mode and keys) match the VPN-1 Edge appliance's encryption settings.
• If MAC filtering is enabled, verify that the MAC address of all stations is
listed in the Network Objects page (see Viewing and Deleting Network
Objects on page 139).
How do I test wireless reception?
• Look at the Wireless page, and check for excessive errors or dropped
packets.
• Look at the Active Computers page, to see information for specific wireless
stations, such as the number of transmission errors, and the current
reception power of each station.
• On the wireless station, open a command window and type ping
my.firewall. If you see a large number of dropped packets, you are
experiencing poor reception.
Wireless reception is poor. What should I do?
• Adjust the angle of the antennas, until the reception improves. The
antennas radiate horizontally in all directions.
• If both antennas are connected to the VPN-1 Edge appliance, check that
the Antenna Selection parameter in the WLAN's advanced settings is set to
Automatic (see Manually Configuring a WLAN on page 167).
• Relocate the VPN-1 Edge appliance to a place with better reception, and
avoid obstructions, such as walls and electrical equipment. For example,
try mounting the appliance in a high place with a direct line of sight to the
wireless stations.
• Check for interference with nearby electrical equipment, such as
microwave ovens and cordless or cellular phones.

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 185


Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity

• Check the Transmission Power parameter in the WLAN's advanced settings


(see Manually Configuring a WLAN on page 167).
• Make sure that you are not using two access points in close proximity and
on the same frequency. For minimum interference, channel separation
between nearby access points must be at least 25 MHz (5 channels).
• The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports XR (Extended Range) technology.
For best range, enable XR mode in the WLAN's advanced settings (see
Manually Configuring a WLAN on page 167), and use XR-enabled
stations.
• Range outdoors is normally much higher than indoors, depending on
environmental conditions.

Note: You can observe any changes in the wireless reception in the Active Computers
page. Make sure to refresh the page after making a change.

Note: Professional companies are available for help in setting up reliable wireless
networks, with access to specialized testing equipment and procedures.

There are excessive collisions between wireless stations. What should I do?
If you have many concurrently active wireless stations, there may be collisions
between them. Such collisions may be the result of a "hidden node" problem: not
all of the stations are within range of each other, and therefore are "hidden" from
one another. For example, if station A and station C do not detect each other, but
both stations detect and are detected by station B, then both station A and C may
attempt to send packets to station B simultaneously. In this case, the packets will
collide, and Station B will receive corrupted data.
The solution to this problem lies in the use of the RTS protocol. Before sending a
certain size IP packet, a station sends an RTS (Request To Send) packet. If the
recipient is not currently receiving packets from another source, it sends back a
CTS (Clear To Send) packet, indicating that the station can send the IP packet. Try
setting the RTS Threshold parameter in the WLAN's advanced settings (see
Manually Configuring a WLAN on page 167) to a lower value. This will cause
stations to use RTS for smaller IP packets, thus decreasing the likeliness of
collisions.

186 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity

In addition, try setting the Fragmentation Threshold parameter in the WLAN's


advanced settings (see Manually Configuring a WLAN on page 167) to a lower
value. This will cause stations to fragment IP packets of a certain size into smaller
packets, thereby reducing the likeliness of collisions and increasing network speed.

Note: Reducing the RTS Threshold and the Fragmentation Threshold too much can
have a negative impact on performance.

Note: Setting an RTS Threshold value equal to the Fragmentation Threshold value
effectively disables RTS.

I am not getting the full speed. What should I do?


• The actual speed is always less then the theoretical speed, and degrades
with distance.
• Read the section about reception problems. Better reception means better
speed.
• Check that all your wireless stations support the wireless standard you are
using (802.11g or 802.11g Super), and that this standard is enabled in the
station software. Transmission speed is determined by the slowest station
associated with the access point. For a list of wireless stations that support
802.11g Super, see www.super-ag.com.

Chapter 7: Configuring a Wireless Network 187


Viewing the Event Log

Chapter 8

Viewing Reports
This chapter describes the VPN-1 Edge Portal reports.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Viewing the Event Log.............................................................................189
Using the Traffic Monitor ........................................................................193
Viewing Computers..................................................................................196
Viewing Connections ...............................................................................199
Viewing Wireless Statistics ......................................................................200

Viewing the Event Log

You can track network activity using the Event Log. The Event Log displays the
most recent events and color-codes them.

Table 26: Event Log Color Coding

An event marked in Indicates…


this color…

Blue Changes in your setup that you have made yourself or as a result of
a security update implemented by your Service Center.

Red Connection attempts that were blocked by your firewall.

Orange Connection attempts that were blocked by your custom security


rules.

Chapter 8: Viewing Reports 189


Viewing the Event Log

An event marked in Indicates…


this color…

Green Traffic accepted by the firewall.

By default, accepted traffic is not logged.

However, such traffic may be logged if specified by a security policy


downloaded from your Service Center, or if specified in user-defined
rules.

You can create firewall rules specifying that certain types of connections should be
logged, whether the connections are incoming or outgoing, blocked or accepted.
For information, see Using Rules on page 212.
The logs detail the date and the time the event occurred, and its type. If the event is
a communication attempt that was rejected by the firewall, the event details include
the source and destination IP address, the destination port, and the protocol used for
the communication attempt (for example, TCP or UDP). If the event is a
connection made or attempted over a VPN tunnel, the event is marked by a lock
icon in the VPN column.
This information is useful for troubleshooting. You can export the logs to an *.xls
(Microsoft Excel) file, and then store it for analysis purposes or send it to technical
support.

Note: You can configure the VPN-1 Edge appliance to send event logs to a Syslog
server. For information, see Configuring Syslog Logging on page 398.

190 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing the Event Log

To view the event log


1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Event Log tab.
The Event Log page appears.

2. If an event is highlighted in red, indicating a blocked attack on your network,


you can display the attacker’s details, by clicking on the IP address of the
attacking machine.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance queries the Internet WHOIS server, and a window
displays the name of the entity to whom the IP address is registered and their
contact information. This information is useful in tracking down hackers.
3. To refresh the display, click Refresh.
4. To save the displayed events to an *.xls file:

Chapter 8: Viewing Reports 191


Viewing the Event Log

a. Click Save.
A standard File Download dialog box appears.
b. Click Save.
The Save As dialog box appears.
c. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
d. Type a name for the configuration file and click Save.
The *.xls file is created and saved to the specified directory.
5. To clear all displayed events:
a. Click Clear.
A confirmation message appears.
b. Click OK.
All events are cleared.

192 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using the Traffic Monitor

Using the Traffic Monitor

You can view incoming and outgoing traffic for selected network interfaces and
QoS classes using the Traffic Monitor. This enables you to identify network traffic
trends and anomalies, and to fine tune Traffic Shaper QoS class assignments.
The Traffic Monitor displays separate bar charts for incoming traffic and outgoing
traffic, and displays traffic rates in kilobits/second. If desired, you can change the
number of seconds represented by the bars in the charts, using the procedure
Configuring Traffic Monitor Settings on page 195.
In network traffic reports, the traffic is color-coded as described in the table below.
In the All QoS Classes report, the traffic is color-coded by QoS class.

Table 27: Traffic Monitor Color Coding for Networks

Traffic marked in this color… Indicates…

Blue VPN-encrypted traffic

Red Traffic blocked by the firewall

Green Traffic accepted by the firewall

You can export a detailed traffic report for all enabled networks and all defined
QoS classes, using the procedure Exporting General Traffic Reports on page 195.

Viewing Traffic Reports

To view a traffic report


1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Traffic Monitor tab.

Chapter 8: Viewing Reports 193


Using the Traffic Monitor

The Traffic Monitor page appears.

2. In the Traffic Monitor Report drop-down list, select the network interface for
which you want to view a report.
The list includes all currently enabled networks. For example, if the DMZ
network is enabled, it will appear in the list.
If Traffic Shaper is enabled, the list also includes the defined QoS classes.
Choose All QoS Classes to display a report including all QoS classes. For
information on enabling Traffic Shaper see Using Internet Setup on page 65.
The selected report appears in the Traffic Monitor page.
3. To refresh all traffic reports, click Refresh.
4. To clear all traffic reports, click Clear.

Note: The firewall blocks broadcast packets used during the normal operation of
your network. This may lead to a certain amount of traffic of the type "Traffic
blocked by firewall" that appears under normal circumstances and usually does not
indicate an attack.

194 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using the Traffic Monitor

Exporting General Traffic Reports

You can export a general traffic report that includes information for all enabled
networks and all defined QoS classes to a *.csv (Comma Separated Values) file.
You can open and view the file in Microsoft Excel.

To export a general traffic report


1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Traffic Monitor tab.
The Traffic Monitor page appears.
2. Click Export.
A standard File Download dialog box appears.
3. Click Save.
The Save As dialog box appears.
4. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
5. Type a name for the configuration file and click Save.
A *.csv file is created and saved to the specified directory.

Configuring Traffic Monitor Settings

You can configure the interval at which the VPN-1 Edge appliance should collect
traffic data for network traffic reports.

To configure Traffic Monitor settings


1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Traffic Monitor tab.
The Traffic Monitor page appears.
2. Click Settings.

Chapter 8: Viewing Reports 195


Viewing Computers

The Traffic Monitor Settings page appears.

3. In the Sample monitoring data every field, type the interval (in seconds) at which
the VPN-1 Edge appliance should collect traffic data.
The default value is one sample every 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
4. Click Apply.

Viewing Computers

This option allows you to view the currently active computers on your network.
The active computers are graphically displayed, each with its name, IP address, and
settings (DHCP, Static, etc.). You can also view node limit information.

To view the active computers


1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Active Computers tab.

196 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing Computers

The Active Computers page appears.

If you configured High Availability, both the master and backup appliances are
shown. If you configured OfficeMode, the OfficeMode network is shown.
If you are using VPN-1 Edge W, the wireless stations are shown. For
information on viewing statistics for these computers, see Viewing Wireless
Statistics on page 200. If a wireless station has been blocked from accessing the
Internet through the VPN-1 Edge appliance, the reason why it was blocked is
shown in red.
If you are exceeding the maximum number of computers allowed by your
license, a warning message appears, and the computers over the node limit are
marked in red. These computers are still protected, but they are blocked from
accessing the Internet through the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
If HotSpot mode is enabled for some networks, each computer's HotSpot status
is displayed next to it. The possible statuses include:

Chapter 8: Viewing Reports 197


Viewing Computers

• Authenticated. The computer is logged on to My HotSpot.


• Not Authenticated. The computer is not logged on to My HotSpot.
• Excluded from HotSpot. The computer is in an IP address range excluded
from HotSpot enforcement. To enforce HotSpot, you must edit the
network object. See Adding and Editing Network Objects on page 131.
Note: Computers that did not communicate through the firewall are not counted for
node limit purposes, even though they are protected by the firewall.

Note: To increase the number of computers allowed by your license, you can
upgrade your product. For further information, see Upgrading Your Software
Product on page 393.

Next to each computer, an Add button enables you to add a network object for
the computer, or an Edit button enables you to edit an existing network object
for the computer. For information on adding and editing network objects, see
Adding and Editing Network Objects on page 131.
2. To refresh the display, click Refresh.
3. To view node limit information, do the following:
a. Click Node Limit.
The Node Limit window appears with installed software product and the
number of nodes used.

b. Click Close to close the window.

198 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing Connections

Viewing Connections

This option allows you to view the currently active connections between your
network and the external world.

To view the active connections


1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Active Connections tab.
The Active Connections page appears.

The page displays the information in the table below.


2. To refresh the display, click Refresh.
3. To view information on the destination machine, click its IP address.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance queries the Internet WHOIS server, and a window
displays the name of the entity to which the IP address is registered and their
contact information.

Chapter 8: Viewing Reports 199


Viewing Wireless Statistics

4. To view information about a port, click the port.


A window opens displaying information about the port.

Table 28: Active Connections Fields

This field… Displays…

Protocol The protocol used (TCP, UDP, etc.)

Source - IP Address The source IP address

Source - Port The source port

Destination - IP The destination IP address


Address

Destination -Port The destination port

QoS Class The QoS class to which the connection belongs

Options An icon indicating further details:

• - The connection is encrypted.


• - The connection is being scanned by VStream Antivirus.

Viewing Wireless Statistics

If your WLAN is enabled, you can view wireless statistics for the WLAN or for
individual wireless stations.

To view statistics for the WLAN


1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Wireless tab.

200 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing Wireless Statistics

The Wireless page appears.

The page displays the information in the table below.


2. To refresh the display, click Refresh.

Table 29: WLAN Statistics

This field… Displays…

Wireless The operation mode used by the WLAN, followed by the transmission rate in
Mode Mbps

MAC Address The MAC address of the VPN-1 Edge appliance's WLAN interface

Domain The VPN-1 Edge access point's region

Country The country configured for the WLAN

Channel The radio frequency used by the WLAN

Chapter 8: Viewing Reports 201


Viewing Wireless Statistics

This field… Displays…

Security The security mode used by the WLAN

Connected The number of wireless stations currently connected to the WLAN


Stations

Frames OK The total number of frames that were successfully transmitted and received

Errors The total number of transmitted and received frames for which an error
occurred

Discarded/ The total number of discarded or dropped frames transmitted and received
Dropped
Frames

Unicast Frames The number of unicast frames transmitted and received

Broadcast The number of broadcast frames transmitted and received


Frames

Multicast The number of multicast frames transmitted and received


Frames

To view statistics for a wireless station


1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Active Computers tab.
The Active Computers page appears.
The following information appears next to each wireless station:
• The signal strength in dB
• A bar chart representing the signal strength
2. Mouse-over the information icon next to the wireless station.
A tooltip displays displays statistics for the wireless station, as described in the
table below.

202 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing Wireless Statistics

3. To refresh the display, click Refresh.

Table 30: Wireless Station Statistics

This field… Displays…

Current Rate The current reception and transmission rate in Mbps

Frames OK The total number of frames that were successfully transmitted and received

Errors The total number of transmitted and received frames for which an error
occurred

Discarded/ The total number of discarded or dropped frames transmitted and received
Dropped
Frames

Unicast Frames The number of unicast frames transmitted and received

Broadcast The number of broadcast frames transmitted and received


Frames

Multicast The number of multicast frames transmitted and received


Frames

WLAN Mode The wireless client's operation mode, indicating the client's maximum speed.
Possible values are B, G, and 108G.

For more information, see Basic WLAN Settings Fields on page 170.

XR Indicates whether the wireless client supports Extended Range (XR) mode.
Possible values are:

• yes. The wireless client supports XR mode.


• no. The wireless client does not support XR mode.

Chapter 8: Viewing Reports 203


Viewing Wireless Statistics

This field… Displays…

Cipher The security protocol used for the connection with the wireless client.

For more information, see Wireless Security Protocols on page 165.

204 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing Wireless Statistics

Chapter 9

Setting Your Security Policy


This chapter describes how to set up your VPN-1 Edge appliance security policy.
You can enhance your security policy by subscribing to services such as Web
Filtering and Email Filtering. You can also integrate all VPN-1 Edge appliances
into an overall enterprise security policy by connecting to SMART management.

Note: When the firewall is managed by SmartCenter, the


SmartCenter security policy replaces the default security policy
and the firewall security levels. The firewall security level is set
to High and cannot be changed.

Note: Local security rules take precedence over rules configured


by the central management.

For information on subscribing to services and SMART Management, see SMART


Management and Subscription Services on page 287.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 205


Default Security Policy

This chapter includes the following topics:


Default Security Policy............................................................................ 206
Setting the Firewall Security Level ......................................................... 207
Configuring Servers................................................................................. 210
Using Rules ............................................................................................. 212
Using SmartDefense ................................................................................ 223
Using Secure HotSpot ............................................................................. 261
Defining an Exposed Host ....................................................................... 266

Default Security Policy


The VPN-1 Edge default security policy includes the following rules:
• Access is blocked from the WAN (Internet) to all internal networks (LAN,
DMZ, WLAN, VLANs, and OfficeMode).
• Access is allowed from the internal networks to the WAN, according to the
firewall security level (Low/Medium/High).
• Access is allowed from the LAN network to the other internal networks
(DMZ, WLAN, VLANs, and OfficeMode).
• Access is blocked from the DMZ, WLAN, VLAN, and OfficeMode
networks to the other internal networks, (including between different
VLANs).
• HTTP access to the VPN-1 Edge Portal (my.firewall and my.vpn) is
allowed from all internal networks except the WLAN. The WLAN can
only access the VPN-1 Edge Portal using HTTPS, unless a specific user-
defined rule allows this.
• When using the print server function (see Using Network Printers on page
437), access from internal networks to connected network printers is
allowed.
• Access from the WAN to network printers is blocked.
These rules are independent of the firewall security level.

206 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Setting the Firewall Security Level

You can easily override the default security policy, by creating user-defined
firewall rules. For further information, see Using Rules on page 212.

Setting the Firewall Security Level

The firewall security level can be controlled using a simple lever available on the
Firewall page. You can set the lever to three states.

Table 31: Firewall Security Levels

This Does this… Further Details


level…

Low Enforces basic control on All inbound traffic is blocked to the external VPN-1
incoming connections, Edge appliance IP address, except for ICMP
while permitting all echoes ("pings").
outgoing connections.
All outbound connections are allowed.

Medium Enforces strict control on All inbound traffic is blocked.


all incoming connections,
All outbound traffic is allowed to the Internet
while permitting safe
except for Windows file sharing (NBT ports 137,
outgoing connections.
138, 139 and 445).
This is the default level
and is recommended for
most cases. Leave it
unchanged unless you
have a specific need for a
higher or lower security
level.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 207


Setting the Firewall Security Level

This Does this… Further Details


level…

High Enforces strict control on All inbound traffic is blocked.


all incoming and outgoing
Restricts all outbound traffic except for the
connections.
following: Web traffic (HTTP, HTTPS), email
(IMAP, POP3, SMTP), ftp, newsgroups, Telnet,
DNS, IPSEC IKE and VPN traffic.

Note: If the security policy is remotely managed, this lever might be disabled.

Note: The definitions of firewall security levels provided in this table represent the
VPN-1 Edge appliance’s default security policy. Security updates downloaded from
a Service Center may alter this policy and change these definitions.

208 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Setting the Firewall Security Level

To change the firewall security level


1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Firewall tab.
The Firewall page appears.

2. Drag the security lever to the desired level.


The VPN-1 Edge appliance security level changes accordingly.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 209


Configuring Servers

Configuring Servers

Note: If you do not intend to host any public Internet servers (Web Server, Mail
Server etc.) in your network, you can skip this section.

Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal, you can selectively allow incoming network
connections into your network. For example, you can set up your own Web server,
Mail server or FTP server.

Note: Configuring servers allows you to create simple Allow and Forward rules for
common services, and it is equivalent to creating Allow and Forward rules in the
Rules page. For information on creating rules, see Using Rules on page 212.

To allow a service to be run on a specific host


1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Servers tab.

210 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Servers

The Servers page appears, displaying a list of services and a host IP address for
each allowed service.

2. Complete the fields using the information in the table below.


3. Click Apply.
A success message appears, and the selected computer is allowed to run the
desired service or application.

Table 32: Servers Page Fields

In this Do this…
column…

Allow Select the desired service or application.

VPN Only Select this option to allow only connections made through a VPN.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 211


Using Rules

In this Do this…
column…

Host IP Type the IP address of the computer that will run the service (one of your
network computers) or click the corresponding This Computer button to
allow your computer to host the service.

To stop the forwarding of a service to a specific host


1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Servers tab.
The Servers page appears, displaying a list of services and a host IP address for
each allowed service.
2. In the desired service or application’s row, click Clear.
The Host IP field of the desired service is cleared.
3. Click Apply.
The service or application is not allowed on the specific host.

Using Rules

The VPN-1 Edge appliance checks the protocol used, the ports range, and the
destination IP address, when deciding whether to allow or block traffic.
User-defined rules have priority over the default security policy rules and provide
you with greater flexibility in defining and customizing your security policy.
For example, if you assign your company’s accounting department to the LAN
network and the rest of the company to the DMZ network, then as a result of the
default security policy rules, the accounting department will be able to connect to
all company computers, while the rest of the employees will not be able to access
any sensitive information on the accounting department computers. You can
override the default security policy rules, by creating firewall rules that allow

212 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Rules

specific DMZ computers (such a manager’s computer) to connect to the LAN


network and the accounting department.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance processes user-defined rules in the order they appear in
the Rules table, so that rule 1 is applied before rule 2, and so on. This enables you
to define exceptions to rules, by placing the exceptions higher up in the Rules table.
For example, if you want to block all outgoing FTP traffic, except traffic from a
specific IP address, you can create a rule blocking all outgoing FTP traffic and
move the rule down in the Rules table. Then create a rule allowing FTP traffic from
the desired IP address and move this rule to a higher location in the Rules table
than the first rule. In the figure below, the general rule is rule number 2, and the
exception is rule number 1.

The VPN-1 Edge appliance will process rule 1 first, allowing outgoing FTP traffic
from the specified IP address, and only then it will process rule 2, blocking all
outgoing FTP traffic.
The following rule types exist:

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 213


Using Rules

Table 33: Firewall Rule Types

Rule Description

Allow and This rule type enables you to do the following:


Forward
• Permit incoming access from the Internet to a specific service in
your internal network.
• Forward all such connections to a specific computer in your
network.
• Redirect the specified connections to a specific port. This option is
called Port Address Translation (PAT).
• Assign traffic to a QoS class.
If Traffic Shaper is enabled for incoming traffic, then Traffic Shaper
will handle relevant connections as specified in the bandwidth policy
for the selected QoS class. For example, if Traffic Shaper is enabled
for incoming traffic, and you create an Allow and Forward rule
associating all incoming Web traffic with the Urgent QoS class, then
Traffic Shaper will handle incoming Web traffic as specified in the
bandwidth policy for the Urgent class.
For information on Traffic Shaper and QoS classes, see Using
Traffic Shaper.

Creating an Allow and Forward rule is equivalent to defining a server in the


Servers page.

Note: You must use this type of rule to allow incoming connections if your
network uses Hide NAT.

Note: You cannot specify two Allow and Forward rules that forward the same
service to two different destinations.

214 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Rules

Rule Description

Allow This rule type enables you to do the following:

• Permit outgoing access from your internal network to a specific


service on the Internet.
Note: You can allow outgoing connections for services that are not
permitted by the default security policy.
• Permit incoming access from the Internet to a specific service in
your internal network.
• Assign traffic to a QoS class.
If Traffic Shaper is enabled for the direction of traffic specified in the
rule (incoming or outgoing), then Traffic Shaper will handle relevant
connections as specified in the bandwidth policy for the selected
QoS class. For example, if Traffic Shaper is enabled for outgoing
traffic, and you create an Allow rule associating all outgoing Web
traffic with the Urgent QoS class, then Traffic Shaper will handle
outgoing Web traffic as specified in the bandwidth policy for the
Urgent class.
For information on Traffic Shaper and QoS classes, see Using
Traffic Shaper.

Note: You cannot use an Allow rule to permit incoming traffic, if the network or
VPN uses Hide NAT. However, you can use Allow rules for static NAT IP
addresses.

Block This rule type enables you to do the following:

• Block outgoing access from your internal network to a specific


service on the Internet.
• Block incoming access from the Internet to a specific service in your
internal network.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 215


Using Rules

Adding and Editing Rules

To add or edit a rule


1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Rules tab.
The Rules page appears.

2. Do one of the following:


• To add a new rule, click Add Rule.
• To edit an existing rule, click the Edit icon next to the desired rule.

216 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Rules

The VPN-1 Edge Firewall Rule wizard opens, with the Step 1: Rule Type dialog
box displayed.

3. Select the type of rule you want to create.


4. Click Next.
The Step 2: Service dialog box appears.
The example below shows an Allow rule.

5. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the table below.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 217


Using Rules

6. Click Next.
The Step 3: Destination & Source dialog box appears.

7. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the table below.
The Step 4: Done dialog box appears.

8. Click Finish.
The new rule appears in the Firewall Rules page.

218 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Rules

Table 34: Firewall Rule Fields

In this field… Do this…

Any Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to any service.

Standard Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to a specific standard
Service service.

You must then select the desired service from the drop-down list.

Custom Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to a specific non-
standard service.

The Protocol and Port Range fields are enabled. You must fill them in.

Protocol Select the protocol (ESP, GRE, TCP, UDP or ANY) for which the rule
should apply.

Ports To specify the port range to which the rule applies, type the start port
number in the left text box, and the end port number in the right text box.

Note: If you do not enter a port range, the rule will apply to all ports. If you
enter only one port number, the range will include only that port.

Source Select the source of the connections you want to allow/block.

To specify an IP address, select Specified IP and type the desired IP address


in the filed provided.

To specify an IP address range, select Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 219


Using Rules

In this field… Do this…

Destination Select the destination of the connections you want to allow or block.

To specify an IP address, select Specified IP and type the desired IP address


in the text box.

To specify an IP address range, select Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided. This option is not available in Allow
and Forward rules.

To specify the VPN-1 Edge IP address, select This Gateway. This option is
not available in Allow and Forward rules.

To specify any destination except the VPN-1 Edge Portal and network
printers, select ANY.

Quality of Select the QoS class to which you want to assign the specified connections.
Service class
If Traffic Shaper is enabled, Traffic Shaper will handle these connections as
specified in the bandwidth policy for the selected QoS class. If Traffic Shaper
is not enabled, this setting is ignored. For information on Traffic Shaper and
QoS classes, see Using Traffic Shaper.

This drop-down list only appears when defining an Allow rule or an Allow and
Forward rule.

Log accepted Select this option to log the specified blocked or allowed connections.
connections /
By default, accepted connections are not logged, and blocked connections
Log blocked
are logged. You can modify this behavior by changing the check box's state.
connections

220 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Rules

In this field… Do this…

Redirect to port Select this option to redirect the connections to a specific port.

You must then type the desired port in the field provided.

This option is called Port Address Translation (PAT), and is only available
when defining an Allow and Forward rule.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 221


Using Rules

Enabling/Disabling Rules

You can temporarily disable a user-defined rule.

To enable/disable a rule
1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Rules tab.
The Rules page appears.
2. Next to the desired rule, do one of the following:
• To enable the rule, click .
The button changes to and the rule is enabled.
• To disable the rule, click .
The button changes to and the rule is disabled.

Changing Rules' Priority

To change a rule's priority


1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Rules tab.
The Rules page appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• Click next to the desired rule, to move the rule up in the table.
• Click next to the desired rule, to move the rule down in the table.
The rule's priority changes accordingly.

222 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

Deleting Rules

To delete an existing rule


1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Rules tab.
The Rules page appears.
2. Click the Erase icon of the rule you wish to delete.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click OK.
The rule is deleted.

Using SmartDefense

The VPN-1 Edge appliance includes Check Point SmartDefense Services, based on
Check Point Application Intelligence. SmartDefense provides a combination of
attack safeguards and attack-blocking tools that protect your network in the
following ways:
• Validating compliance to standards
• Validating expected usage of protocols (Protocol Anomaly Detection)
• Limiting application ability to carry malicious data
• Controlling application-layer operations
In addition, SmartDefense aids proper usage of Internet resources, such as FTP,
instant messaging, Peer-to-Peer (P2P) file sharing, file-sharing operations, and File
Transfer Protocol (FTP) uploading, among others.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 223


Using SmartDefense

Configuring SmartDefense

For convenience, SmartDefense is organized as a tree, in which each branch


represents a category of settings.

When a category is expanded, the settings it contains appear as nodes. For


information on each category and the nodes it contains, see SmartDefense
Categories on page 226.

Each node represents an attack type, a sanity check, or a protocol or service that is
vulnerable to attacks. To control how SmartDefense handles an attack, you must
configure the relevant node's settings.

224 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

To configure a SmartDefense node


1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the SmartDefense tab.
The SmartDefense page appears.

The left pane displays a tree containing SmartDefense categories.


• To expand a category, click the icon next to it.
• To collapse a category, click the icon next to it.
2. Expand the relevant category, and click on the desired node.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 225


Using SmartDefense

The right pane displays a description of the node, followed by fields.

3. To modify the node's current settings, do the following:


a) Complete the fields using the relevant information in SmartDefense
Categories on page 226.
b) Click Apply.
4. To reset the node to its default values:
a) Click Default.
A confirmation message appears.
b) Click OK.
The fields are reset to their default values, and your changes are saved.

SmartDefense Categories
SmartDefense includes the following categories:

226 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

• Denial of Service on page 227


• IP and ICMP on page 232
• TCP on page 243
• Port Scan on page 246
• FTP on page 249
• Microsoft Networks on page 254
• IGMP on page 255
• Peer to Peer on page 257
• Instant Messengers on page 259

Denial of Service
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at overwhelming the target with
spurious data, to the point where it is no longer able to respond to legitimate
service requests.
This category includes the following attacks:
• Teardrop on page 227
• Ping of Death on page 228
• LAND on page 229
• Non-TCP Flooding on page 230

Teardrop
In a Teardrop attack, the attacker sends two IP fragments, the latter entirely
contained within the former. This causes some computers to allocate too much
memory and crash.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 227


Using SmartDefense

You can configure how Teardrop attacks should be handled.

Table 35: Teardrop Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when a Teardrop attack occurs, by selecting one
of the following:

• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.


• None. No action.

Track Specify whether to log Teardrop attacks, by selecting one of the following:

• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.


• None. Do not log the attack.

Ping of Death
In a Ping of Death attack, the attacker sends a fragmented PING request that
exceeds the maximum IP packet size (64KB). Some operating systems are unable
to handle such requests and crash.

228 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

You can configure how Ping of Death attacks should be handled.

Table 36: Ping of Death Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when a Ping of Death attack occurs, by selecting
one of the following:

• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.


• None. No action.

Track Specify whether to log Ping of Death attacks, by selecting one of the
following:

• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.


• None. Do not log the attack.

LAND
In a LAND attack, the attacker sends a SYN packet, in which the source address
and port are the same as the destination (the victim computer). The victim
computer then tries to reply to itself and either reboots or crashes.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 229


Using SmartDefense

You can configure how LAND attacks should be handled.

Table 37: LAND Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when a LAND attack occurs, by selecting one of
the following:

• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.


• None. No action.

Track Specify whether to log LAND attacks, by selecting one of the following:

• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.


• None. Do not log the attack.

Non-TCP Flooding
Advanced firewalls maintain state information about connections in a State table.
In non-TCP Flooding attacks, the attacker sends high volumes of non-TCP traffic.
Since such traffic is connectionless, the related state information cannot be cleared
or reset, and the firewall State table is quickly filled up. This prevents the firewall
from accepting new connections and results in a Denial of Service (DoS).

230 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

You can protect against Non-TCP Flooding attacks by limiting the percentage of
state table capacity used for non-TCP connections.

Table 38: Non-TCP Flooding Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when the percentage of state table capacity used
for non-TCP connections reaches the Max. percent non TCP traffic threshold.
Select one of the following:

• Block. Block any additional non-TCP connections.


• None. No action. This is the default.

Track Specify whether to log non-TCP connections that exceed the Max. Percent
Non-TCP Traffic threshold, by selecting one of the following:

• Log. Log the connections.


• None. Do not log the connections. This is the default.

Max. Percent Type the maximum percentage of state table capacity allowed for non-TCP
Non-TCP Traffic connections.

The default value is 0%.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 231


Using SmartDefense

IP and ICMP
This category allows you to enable various IP and ICMP protocol tests, and to
configure various protections against IP and ICMP-related attacks. It includes the
following:
• Packet Sanity on page 232
• Max Ping Size on page 234
• IP Fragments on page 235
• Network Quota on page 237
• Welchia on page 239
• Cisco IOS DOS on page 240
• Null Payload on page 242

Packet Sanity
Packet Sanity performs several Layer 3 and Layer 4 sanity checks. These include
verifying packet size, UDP and TCP header lengths, dropping IP options, and
verifying the TCP flags.

232 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

You can configure whether logs should be issued for offending packets.

Table 39: Packet Sanity Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when a packet fails a sanity test, by selecting
one of the following:

• Block. Block the packet. This is the default.


• None. No action.

Track Specify whether to issue logs for packets that fail the packet sanity tests, by
selecting one of the following:

• Log. Issue logs. This is the default.


• None. Do not issue logs.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 233


Using SmartDefense

In this field… Do this…

Disable relaxed The UDP length verification sanity check measures the UDP header length
UDP length and compares it to the UDP header length specified in the UDP header. If
verification the two values differ, the packet may be corrupted.

However, since different applications may measure UDP header length


differently, the VPN-1 Edge appliance relaxes the UDP length verification
sanity check by default, performing the check but not dropping offending
packets. This is called relaxed UDP length verification.

Specify whether the VPN-1 Edge appliance should relax the UDP length
verification sanity check or not, by selecting one of the following:

• True. Disable relaxed UDP length verification. The VPN-1 Edge


appliance will drop packets that fail the UDP length verification
check.
• False. Do not disable relaxed UDP length verification. The VPN-1
Edge appliance will not drop packets that fail the UDP length
verification check. This is the default.

Max Ping Size


PING (ICMP echo request) is a program that uses ICMP protocol to check whether
a remote machine is up. A request is sent by the client, and the server responds
with a reply echoing the client's data.

234 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

An attacker can echo the client with a large amount of data, causing a buffer
overflow. You can protect against such attacks by limiting the allowed size for
ICMP echo requests.

Table 40: Max Ping Size Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when an ICMP echo response exceeds the Max
Ping Size threshold, by selecting one of the following:

• Block. Block the request. This is the default.


• None. No action.

Track Specify whether to log ICMP echo responses that exceed the Max Ping Size
threshold, by selecting one of the following:

• Log. Log the responses. This is the default.


• None. Do not log the responses.

Max Ping Size Specify the maximum data size for ICMP echo response.

The default value is 1500.

IP Fragments
When an IP packet is too big to be transported by a network link, it is split into
several smaller IP packets and transmitted in fragments. To conceal a known attack

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 235


Using SmartDefense

or exploit, an attacker might imitate this common behavior and break the data
section of a single packet into several fragmented packets. Without reassembling
the fragments, it is not always possible to detect such an attack. Therefore, the
VPN-1 Edge appliance always reassembles all the fragments of a given IP packet,
before inspecting it to make sure there are no attacks or exploits in the packet.
You can configure how fragmented packets should be handled.

Table 41: IP Fragments Fields

In this field… Do this…

Forbid IP Fragments Specify whether all fragmented packets should be dropped, by selecting
one of the following:

• True. Drop all fragmented packets.


• False. No action. This is the default.

Under normal circumstances, it is recommended to leave this field set to


False. Setting this field to True may disrupt Internet connectivity, because
it does not allow any fragmented packets.

Max Number of Type the maximum number of fragmented packets allowed. Packets
Incomplete Packets exceeding this threshold will be dropped.

The default value is 300.

236 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

In this field… Do this…

Timeout for When the VPN-1 Edge appliance receives packet fragments, it waits for
Discarding additional fragments to arrive, so that it can reassemble the packet.
Incomplete Packets Type the number of seconds to wait before discarding incomplete
packets.

The default value is 10.

Track Specify whether to log fragmented packets, by selecting one of the


following:

• Log. Log all fragmented packets.


• None. Do not log the fragmented packets. This is the default.

Network Quota
An attacker may try to overload a server in your network by establishing a very
large number of connections per second. To protect against Denial Of Service
(DoS) attacks, Network Quota enforces a limit upon the number of connections per
second that are allowed from the same source IP address.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 237


Using SmartDefense

You can configure how connection that exceed that limit should be handled.

Table 42: Network Quota Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when the number of network connections
from the same source reaches the Max. Connections/Second per Source IP
threshold. Select one of the following:

• Block. Block all new connections from the source. Existing


connections will not be blocked. This is the default.
• None. No action.

Track Specify whether to log connections from a specific source that exceed
the Max. Connections/Second per Source IP threshold, by selecting one of
the following:

• Log. Log the connections. This is the default.


• None. Do not log the connections.

238 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

In this field… Do this…

Max. Type the maximum number of network connections allowed per second
Connections/Second from the same source IP address.
from Same Source IP
The default value is 100.

Set a lower threshold for stronger protection against DoS attacks.

Note: Setting this value too low can lead to false alarms.

Welchia
The Welchia worm uses the MS DCOM vulnerability or a WebDAV vulnerability.
After infecting a computer, the worm begins searching for other live computers to
infect. It does so by sending a specific ping packet to a target and waiting for the
reply that signals that the target is alive. This flood of pings may disrupt network
connectivity.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 239


Using SmartDefense

You can configure how the Welchia worm should be handled.

Table 43: Welchia Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when the Welchia worm is detected, by selecting
one of the following:

• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.


• None. No action.

Track Specify whether to log Welchia worm attacks, by selecting one of the
following:

• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.


• None. Do not log the attack.

Cisco IOS DOS


Cisco routers are configured to process and accept Internet Protocol version 4
(IPv4) packets by default. When a Cisco IOS device is sent a specially crafted
sequence of IPv4 packets (with protocol type 53 - SWIPE, 55 - IP Mobility, 77 -
Sun ND, or 103 - Protocol Independent Multicast - PIM), the router will stop
processing inbound traffic on that interface.

240 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

You can configure how Cisco IOS DOS attacks should be handled.

Table 44: Cisco IOS DOS

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when a Cisco IOS DOS attack occurs,
by selecting one of the following:

• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.


• None. No action.

Track Specify whether to log Cisco IOS DOS attacks, by selecting one of
the following:

• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.


• None. Do not log the attack.

Number of Hops to Protect Type the number of hops from the enforcement module that Cisco
routers should be protected.

The default value is 10.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 241


Using SmartDefense

In this field… Do this…

Action Protection for Specify what action to take when an IPv4 packet of the specific
SWIPE - Protocol 53 / protocol type is received, by selecting one of the following:
IP Mobility - Protocol 55 /
• Block. Drop the packet. This is the default.
SUN-ND - Protocol 77 / • None. No action.
PIM - Protocol 103

Null Payload
Some worms, such as Sasser, use ICMP echo request packets with null payload to
detect potentially vulnerable hosts.
You can configure how null payload ping packets should be handled.

Table 45: Null Payload Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when null payload ping packets are detected, by
selecting one of the following:

• Block. Block the packets. This is the default.


• None. No action.

242 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

In this field… Do this…

Track Specify whether to log null payload ping packets, by selecting one of the
following:

• Log. Log the packets. This is the default.


• None. Do not log the packets.

TCP
This category allows you to configure various protections related to the TCP
protocol. It includes the following:
• Strict TCP on page 243
• Small PMTU on page 244

Strict TCP
Out-of-state TCP packets are SYN-ACK or data packets that arrive out of order,
before the TCP SYN packet.

Note: In normal conditions, out-of-state TCP packets can occur after the VPN-1
Edge restarts, since connections which were established prior to the reboot are
unknown. This is normal and does not indicate an attack.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 243


Using SmartDefense

You can configure how out-of-state TCP packets should be handled.

Table 46: Strict TCP

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when an out-of-state TCP packet arrives, by
selecting one of the following:

• Block. Block the packets.


• None. No action. This is the default.

Track Specify whether to log null payload ping packets, by selecting one of the
following:

• Log. Log the packets. This is the default.


• None. Do not log the packets.

Small PMTU
Small PMTU (Packet MTU) is a bandwidth attack in which the client fools the
server into sending large amounts of data using small packets. Each packet has a
large overhead that creates a "bottleneck" on the server.

244 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

You can protect against this attack by specifying a minimum packet size for data
sent over the Internet.

Table 47: Small PMTU Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when a packet is smaller than the Minimal MTU
Size threshold, by selecting one of the following:

• Block. Block the packet.


• None. No action. This is the default.

Track Specify whether to issue logs for packets are smaller than the Minimal MTU
Size threshold, by selecting one of the following:

• Log. Issue logs. This is the default.


• None. Do not issue logs.

Minimal MTU Type the minimum value allowed for the MTU field in IP packets sent by a
Size client.

An overly small value will not prevent an attack, while an overly large value
might degrade performance and cause legitimate requests to be dropped.

The default value is 300.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 245


Using SmartDefense

Port Scan
An attacker can perform a port scan to determine whether ports are open and
vulnerable to an attack. This is most commonly done by attempting to access a port
and waiting for a response. The response indicates whether or not the port is open.
This category includes the following types of port scans:
• Host Port Scan. The attacker scans a specific host's ports to determine
which of the ports are open.
• Sweep Scan. The attacker scans various hosts to determine where a specific
port is open.
You can configure how the VPN-1 Edge appliance should react when a port scan is
detected.

246 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

Table 48: Port Scan Fields

In this field… Do this…

Number of ports SmartDefense detects ports scans by measuring the number of ports
accessed accessed over a period of time. The number of ports accessed must exceed
the Number of ports accessed value, within the number of seconds specified by
the In a period of [seconds] value, in order for SmartDefense to consider the
activity a scan.

Type the minimum number of ports that must be accessed within the In a
period of [seconds] period, in order for SmartDefense to detect the activity as
a port scan.

For example, if this value is 30, and 40 ports are accessed within a specified
period of time, SmartDefense will detect the activity as a port scan.

For Host Port Scan, the default value is 30. For Sweep Scan, the default
value is 50.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 247


Using SmartDefense

In this field… Do this…

In a period of SmartDefense detects ports scans by measuring the number of ports


[seconds] accessed over a period of time. The number of ports accessed must exceed
the Number of ports accessed value, within the number of seconds specified by
the In a period of [seconds] value, in order for SmartDefense to consider the
activity a scan.

Type the maximum number of seconds that can elapse, during which the
Number of ports accessed threshold is exceeded, in order for SmartDefense to
detect the activity as a port scan.

For example, if this value is 20, and the Number of ports accessed threshold is
exceeded for 15 seconds, SmartDefense will detect the activity as a port
scan. If the threshold is exceeded for 30 seconds, SmartDefense will not
detect the activity as a port scan.

The default value is 20 seconds.

Track Specify whether to issue logs for scans, by selecting one of the following:

• Log. Issue logs. This is the default.


• None. Do not issue logs. This is the default.

Detect scans Specify whether to detect only scans originating from the Internet, by
from Internet only selecting one of the following:

• False. Do not detect only scans from the Internet. This is the
default.
• True. Detect only scans from the Internet.

248 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

FTP
This category allows you to configure various protections related to the FTP
protocol. It includes the following:
• FTP Bounce on page 249
• Block Known Ports on page 250
• Block Port Overflow on page 251
• Blocked FTP Commands on page 253

FTP Bounce
When connecting to an FTP server, the client sends a PORT command specifying
the IP address and port to which the FTP server should connect and send data. An
FTP Bounce attack is when an attacker sends a PORT command specifying the IP
address of a third party instead of the attacker's own IP address. The FTP server
then sends data to the victim machine.
You can configure how FTP bounce attacks should be handled.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 249


Using SmartDefense

Table 49: FTP Bounce Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when an FTP Bounce attack occurs, by selecting
one of the following:

• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.


• None. No action.

Track Specify whether to log FTP Bounce attacks, by selecting one of the
following:

• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.


• None. Do not log the attack.

Block Known Ports


You can choose to block the FTP server from connecting to well-known ports.

Note: Known ports are published ports associated with services (for example, SMTP
is port 25).

250 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

This provides a second layer of protection against FTP bounce attacks, by


preventing such attacks from reaching well-known ports.

Table 50: Block Known Ports Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when the FTP server attempts to connect to a
well-known port, by selecting one of the following:

• Block. Block the connection.


• None. No action. This is the default.

Block Port Overflow


FTP clients send PORT commands when connecting to the FTP sever. A PORT
command consists of a series of numbers between 0 and 255, separated by
commas.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 251


Using SmartDefense

To enforce compliance to the FTP standard and prevent potential attacks against
the FTP server, you can block PORT commands that contain a number greater than
255.

Table 51: Block Port Overflow

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take for PORT commands containing a number
greater than 255, by selecting one of the following:

• Block. Block the PORT command. This is the default.


• None. No action.

252 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

Blocked FTP Commands


Some seldom-used FTP commands may compromise FTP server security and
integrity. You can specify which FTP commands should be allowed to pass through
the security server, and which should be blocked.

To enable FTP command blocking

• In the Action drop-down list, select Block.


The FTP commands listed in the Blocked commands box will be blocked.
FTP command blocking is enabled by default.

To disable FTP command blocking

• In the Action drop-down list, select None.


All FTP commands are allowed, including those in the Blocked commands box.

To block a specific FTP command


1. In the Allowed commands box, select the desired FTP command.
2. Click Block.
The FTP command appears in the Blocked commands box.
3. Click Apply.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 253


Using SmartDefense

When FTP command blocking is enabled, the FTP command will be blocked.

To allow a specific FTP command


1. In the Blocked commands box, select the desired FTP command.
2. Click Accept.
The FTP command appears in the Allowed commands box.
3. Click Apply.
The FTP command will be allowed, regardless of whether FTP command
blocking is enabled or disabled.

Microsoft Networks
This category includes File and Print Sharing.
Microsoft operating systems and Samba clients rely on Common Internet File
System (CIFS), a protocol for sharing files and printers. However, this protocol is
also widely used by worms as a means of propagation.
You can configure how CIFS worms should be handled.

254 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

Table 52: File Print and Sharing Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when a CIFS worm attack is detected, by
selecting one of the following:

• Block. Block the attack.


• None. No action. This is the default.

Track Specify whether to log CIFS worm attacks, by selecting one of the
following:

• Log. Log the attack.


• None. Do not log the attack. This is the default.

CIFS worm patterns


Select the worm patterns to detect.
list Patterns are matched against file names (including file
paths but excluding the disk share name) that the client is
trying to read or write from the server.

IGMP
This category includes the IGMP protocol.
IGMP is used by hosts and routers to dynamically register and discover multicast
group membership. Attacks on the IGMP protocol usually target a vulnerability in
the multicast routing software/hardware used, by sending specially crafted IGMP
packets.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 255


Using SmartDefense

You can configure how IGMP attacks should be handled.

Table 53: IGMP Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when an IGMP attack occurs, by selecting
one of the following:

• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.


• None. No action.

Track Specify whether to log IGMP attacks, by selecting one of the following:

• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.


• None. Do not log the attack.

256 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

In this field… Do this…

Enforce IGMP to According to the IGMP specification, IGMP packets must be sent to
multicast addresses multicast addresses. Sending IGMP packets to a unicast or broadcast
address might constitute and attack; therefore the VPN-1 Edge appliance
blocks such packets.

Specify whether to allow or block IGMP packets that are sent to non-
multicast addresses, by selecting one of the following:

• Block. Block IGMP packets that are sent to non-multicast


addresses. This is the default.
• None. No action.

Peer to Peer
SmartDefense can block peer-to-peer traffic, by identifying the proprietary
protocols and preventing the initial connection to the peer-to-peer networks. This
prevents not only downloads, but also search operations.
This category includes the following nodes:
• KaZaA
• Gnutella
• eMule
• BitTorrent

Note: SmartDefense can detect peer-to-peer traffic regardless of the TCP port being
used to initiate the session.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 257


Using SmartDefense

In each node, you can configure how peer-to-peer connections of the selected type
should be handled, using the table below.

Table 54: Peer to Peer Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when a connection is attempted, by selecting


one of the following:

• Block. Block the connection.


• None. No action. This is the default.

Track Specify whether to log peer-to-peer connections, by selecting one of the


following:

• Log. Log the connection.


• None. Do not log the connection. This is the default.

Block proprietary Specify whether proprietary protocols should be blocked on all ports, by
protocols on all ports selecting one of the following:

• Block. Block the proprietary protocol on all ports. This in effect


prevents all communication using this peer-to-peer
application. This is the default.
• None. Do not block the proprietary protocol on all ports.

258 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using SmartDefense

Instant Messengers
SmartDefense can block instant messaging applications that use VoIP protocols, by
identifying the messaging application's fingerprints and HTTP headers.
This category includes the following nodes:
• Skype
• Yahoo
• ICQ

Note: SmartDefense can detect instant messaging traffic regardless of the TCP port
being used to initiate the session.

In each node, you can configure how instant messaging connections of the selected
type should be handled, using the table below.

Table 55: Instant Messengers Fields

In this field… Do this…

Action Specify what action to take when a connection is attempted, by selecting


one of the following:

• Block. Block the connection.


• None. No action. This is the default.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 259


Using SmartDefense

In this field… Do this…

Track Specify whether to log instant messenger connections, by selecting one


of the following:

• Log. Log the connection.


• None. Do not log the connection. This is the default.

Block proprietary Specify whether proprietary protocols should be blocked on all ports, by
protocols on all ports selecting one of the following:

• Block. Block the proprietary protocol on all ports. This in effect


prevents all communication using this instant messenger
application. This is the default.
• None. Do not block the proprietary protocol on all ports.

260 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Secure HotSpot

Using Secure HotSpot

You can enable your VPN-1 Edge appliance as a public Internet access hotspot for
specific networks. When users on those networks attempt to access the Internet,
they are automatically re-directed to the My HotSpot page http://my.hotspot. On
this page, they must read and accept the My HotSpot terms of use, and if My
HotSpot is configured to be password-protected, they must log on using their VPN-
1 Edge username and password. The users may then access the Internet.

Users can also log out in the My HotSpot page.

Note: HotSpot users are automatically logged out after one hour of inactivity.

VPN-1 Edge Secure HotSpot is useful in any wired or wireless environment where
Web-based user authentication or terms-of-use approval is required prior to gaining
access to the network. For example, Secure HotSpot can be used in public
computer labs, educational institutions, libraries, Internet cafés, and so on.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance allows you to add guest users quickly and easily. By
default, guest users are given a username and password that expire in 24 hours and
granted HotSpot Access permissions only. For information on adding quick guest
users, see Adding Quick Guest Users on page 377.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 261


Using Secure HotSpot

You can choose to exclude specific network objects from HotSpot enforcement.
For information, see Using Network Objects on page 130.

Important: SecuRemote VPN software users who are authenticated by the Internal
VPN Server are automatically exempt from HotSpot enforcement. This allows, for
example, authenticated employees to gain full access to the corporate LAN, while
guest users are permitted to access the Internet only.

Note: HotSpot enforcement can block traffic passing through the firewall; however, it
does not block local traffic on the same network segment (traffic that does not pass
through the firewall).

Setting Up Secure HotSpot

To set up Secure HotSpot


1. Enable Secure HotSpot for the desired networks.
See Enabling/Disabling Secure HotSpot on page 263.
2. Customize Secure HotSpot as desired.
See Customizing Secure HotSpot on page 264.
3. Grant HotSpot Access permissions to users on the selected networks.
See Adding and Editing Users on page 373.
4. To exclude specific computers from HotSpot enforcement, by adding or editing
their network objects.
See Adding and Editing Network Objects on page 131.
You must select Exclude this computer/network from HotSpot enforcement
option.
5. Add quick guest users as needed.
See Adding Quick Guest Users on page 377.

262 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Secure HotSpot

Enabling/Disabling Secure HotSpot

To enable/disable Secure HotSpot


1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the My HotSpot tab.
The My HotSpot page appears.

2. In the HotSpot Networks area, do one of the following:


• To enable Secure HotSpot for a specific network, select the check box
next to the network.
• To disable Secure HotSpot for a specific network, clear the check box
next to the network.
3. Click Apply.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 263


Using Secure HotSpot

Customizing Secure HotSpot

To customize Secure HotSpot


1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the My HotSpot tab.
The My HotSpot page appears.
2. Complete the fields using the information in the table below.
Additional fields may appear.

3. To preview the My HotSpot page, click Preview.


A browser window opens displaying the My HotSpot page.
4. Click Apply.

264 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Secure HotSpot

Your changes are saved.

Table 56: My HotSpot Fields

In this field… Do this…

My HotSpot Type the title that should appear on the My HotSpot page.
Title
The default title is "Welcome to My HotSpot".

My HotSpot Type the terms to which the user must agree before accessing the Internet.
Terms
You can use HTML tags as needed.

My HotSpot is Select this option to require users to enter their username and password
password before accessing the Internet.
protected
If this option is not selected, users will be required only to accept the terms of
use before accessing the network.

The Allow a user to login from more than one computer at the same time check box
appears.

Allow a user to Select this option to allow a single user to log on to My HotSpot from multiple
login from more computers at the same time.
than one
computer at the
same time

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 265


Defining an Exposed Host

Defining an Exposed Host

The VPN-1 Edge appliance allows you to define an exposed host, which is a
computer that is not protected by the firewall. This is useful for setting up a public
server. It allows unlimited incoming and outgoing connections between the Internet
and the exposed host computer.
The exposed host receives all traffic that was not forwarded to another computer by
use of Allow and Forward rules.

Warning: Entering an IP address may make the designated computer vulnerable to


hacker attacks. Defining an exposed host is not recommended unless you are fully
aware of the security risks.

To define a computer as an exposed host


1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Exposed Host tab.
The Exposed Host page appears.

266 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Defining an Exposed Host

2. In the Exposed Host field, type the IP address of the computer you wish to
define as an exposed host.
Alternatively, you can click This Computer to define your computer as the
exposed host.
3. Click Apply.
The selected computer is now defined as an exposed host.

To clear the exposed host


1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Exposed Host tab.
The Exposed Host page appears.
2. Click Clear.
3. Click Apply.
No exposed host is defined.

Chapter 9: Setting Your Security Policy 267


Overview

Chapter 10

Using VStream Antivirus


This chapter explains how to use the VStream Antivirus engine to block security
threats before they reach your network.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Overview ..................................................................................................269
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antivirus....................................................271
Viewing VStream Signature Database Information .................................272
Configuring VStream Antivirus ...............................................................273
Updating VStream Antivirus ....................................................................285

Overview
The VPN-1 Edge appliance includes VStream Antivirus, an embedded stream-
based antivirus engine based on Check Point Stateful Inspection and Application
Intelligence technologies, that performs virus scanning at the kernel level.
VStream Antivirus scans files for malicious content on the fly, without
downloading the files into intermediate storage. This means minimal added latency
and support for unlimited file sizes; and since VStream Antivirus stores only
minimal state information per connection, it can scan thousands of connections
concurrently. In order to scan archive files on the fly, VStream Antivirus performs
real-time decompression and scanning of ZIP, TAR, and GZ archive files, with
support for nested archive files.
When VStream Antivirus detects malicious content, the action it takes depends on
the protocol in which the virus was found. See the table below. In each case,
VStream Antivirus blocks the file and writes a log to the Event Log.

Chapter 10: Using VStream Antivirus 269


Overview

Table 57: VStream Antivirus Actions

If a virus if found in VStream Antivirus does this... The protocol is detected


this protocol... on this port...

HTTP • Terminates the All ports on which VStream is


connection
enabled by the policy, not
only port 80

POP3 • Terminates the The standard TCP port 110.


connection
• Deletes the virus-
infected email from the
server

IMAP • Terminates the The standard TCP port 143


connection
• Replaces the virus-
infected email with a
message notifying the
user that a virus was
found

SMTP • Rejects the virus- The standard TCP port 25


infected email with error
code 554
• Sends a "Virus
detected" message to
the sender

FTP • Terminates the data The standard TCP port 21


connection
• Sends a "Virus detected"
message to the FTP
client

TCP and UDP • Terminates the Generic TCP and UDP ports,
connection
other than those listed above

Note: In protocols that are not listed in this table, VStream Antivirus uses a "best
effort" approach to detect viruses. In such cases, detection of viruses is not
guaranteed and depends on the specific encoding used by the protocol.

270 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Enabling/Disabling VStream Antivirus

If you are subscribed to the VStream Antivirus subscription service, VStream


Antivirus virus signatures are automatically updated, so that security is always up-
to-date, and your network is always protected.

Note: VStream Antivirus differs from the Email Antivirus subscription service (part of
the Email Filtering service) in the following ways:

• Email Antivirus is centralized, redirecting traffic through the Service


Center for scanning, while VStream Antivirus scans for viruses in the
VPN-1 Edge gateway itself.
• Email Antivirus is specific to email, scanning incoming POP3 and
outgoing SMTP connections only, while VStream Antivirus supports
additional protocols, including incoming SMTP and outgoing POP3
connections.

You can use either antivirus solution or both in conjunction. For information on
Email Antivirus, see Email Filtering on page 300.

Enabling/Disabling VStream Antivirus

To enable/disable VStream Antivirus


1. Click Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Antivirus tab.

Chapter 10: Using VStream Antivirus 271


Viewing VStream Signature Database Information

The VStream Antivirus page appears.

2. Drag the On/Off lever upwards or downwards.


VStream Antivirus is enabled/disabled for all internal network computers.

Viewing VStream Signature Database Information

VStream Antivirus maintains two databases: a daily database and a main database.
The daily database is updated frequently with the newest virus signatures.
Periodically, the contents of the daily database are moved to the main database,
leaving the daily database empty. This system of incremental updates to the main
database allows for quicker updates and saves on network bandwidth.
You can view information about the VStream signature databases currently in use,
in the VStream Antivirus page.

272 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring VStream Antivirus

Table 58: Account Page Fields

This field… Displays…

Main database The date and time at which the main database was last updated,
followed by the version number.

Daily database The date and time at which the daily database was last updated, followed
by the version number.

Next update The next date and time at which the VPN-1 Edge appliance will check for
updates.

Status The current status of the database. This includes the following statuses:

• Database Not Installed


• OK

Configuring VStream Antivirus


You can configure VStream Antivirus in the following ways:
• Configuring the VStream Antivirus Policy on page 273
• Configuring VStream Advanced Settings on page 281

Configuring the VStream Antivirus Policy

VStream Antivirus includes a flexible mechanism that allows the user to define
exactly which traffic should be scanned, by specifying the protocol, ports, and
source and destination IP addresses.
VStream Antivirus processes policy rules in the order they appear in the Antivirus
Policy table, so that rule 1 is applied before rule 2, and so on. This enables you to
define exceptions to rules, by placing the exceptions higher up in the Rules table.

Chapter 10: Using VStream Antivirus 273


Configuring VStream Antivirus

For example, if you want to scan all outgoing SMTP traffic, except traffic from a
specific IP address, you can create a rule scanning all outgoing SMTP traffic and
move the rule down in the Antivirus Policy table. Then create a rule passing SMTP
traffic from the desired IP address and move this rule to a higher location in the
Antivirus Policy table than the first rule. In the figure below, the general rule is rule
number 2, and the exception is rule number 1.

The VPN-1 Edge appliance will process rule 1 first, passing outgoing SMTP traffic
from the specified IP address, and only then it will process rule 2, scanning all
outgoing SMTP traffic.
The following rule types exist:

VStream Antivirus Rule Types

Table 59: VStream Antivirus Rule Types

Rule Description

Pass This rule type enables you to specify that VStream Antivirus should not scan
traffic matching the rule.

274 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring VStream Antivirus

Rule Description

Scan This rule type enables you to specify that VStream Antivirus should scan traffic
matching the rule.

If a virus is found, it is blocked and logged.

Adding and Editing Rules

To add or edit a rule


1. Click Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
The Antivirus Policy page appears.

2. Do one of the following:


• To add a new rule, click Add Rule.
• To edit an existing rule, click the Edit icon next to the desired rule.

Chapter 10: Using VStream Antivirus 275


Configuring VStream Antivirus

The VStream Policy Rule Wizard opens, with the Step 1: Rule Type dialog box
displayed.

3. Select the type of rule you want to create.


4. Click Next.
The Step 2: Service dialog box appears.
The example below shows a Scan rule.

5. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the table below.

276 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring VStream Antivirus

6. Click Next.
The Step 3: Destination & Source dialog box appears.

7. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the table below.
The Step 4: Done dialog box appears.

8. Click Finish.
The new rule appears in the Firewall Rules page.

Chapter 10: Using VStream Antivirus 277


Configuring VStream Antivirus

Table 60: VStream Rule Fields

In this field… Do this…

Any Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to any service.

Standard Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to a specific standard
Service service.

You must then select the desired service from the drop-down list.

Custom Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to a specific non-
standard service.

The Protocol and Port Range fields are enabled. You must fill them in.

Protocol Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, or ANY) for which the rule should apply.

Ports To specify the port range to which the rule applies, type the start port
number in the left text box, and the end port number in the right text box.

Note: If you do not enter a port range, the rule will apply to all ports. If you
enter only one port number, the range will include only that port.

If the Select the source of the connections you want to allow/block.


connection
To specify an IP address, select Specified IP and type the desired IP address
source is
in the filed provided.

To specify an IP address range, select Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.

278 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring VStream Antivirus

In this field… Do this…

And the Select the destination of the connections you want to allow or block.
destination is
To specify an IP address, select Specified IP and type the desired IP address
in the text box.

To specify an IP address range, select Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided. This option is not available in Allow
and Forward rules.

To specify the VPN-1 Edge Portal and network printers, select This Gateway.
This option is not available in Allow and Forward rules.

To specify any destination except the VPN-1 Edge Portal and network
printers, select ANY.

Data Direction Select the direction of connections to which the rule should apply:

• Download and Upload data. The rule applies to downloaded and


uploaded data. This is the default.
• Download data. The rule applies to downloaded data, that is, data
flowing from the destination of the connection to the source of the
connection.
• Upload data. The rule applies to uploaded data, that is, data flowing
from the source of the connection to the destination of the
connection.

Enabling/Disabling Rules

You can temporarily disable a VStream Antivirus rule.

To enable/disable a rule
1. Click Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
The Antivirus Policy page appears.

Chapter 10: Using VStream Antivirus 279


Configuring VStream Antivirus

2. Next to the desired rule, do one of the following:


• To enable the rule, click .
The button changes to and the rule is enabled.
• To disable the rule, click .
The button changes to and the rule is disabled.

Changing Rules' Priority

To change a rule's priority


1. Click Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
The Antivirus Policy page appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• Click next to the desired rule, to move the rule up in the table.
• Click next to the desired rule, to move the rule down in the table.
The rule's priority changes accordingly.

Deleting Rules

To delete an existing rule


1. Click Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
The Antivirus Policy page appears.
2. Click the Erase icon of the rule you wish to delete.
A confirmation message appears.

280 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring VStream Antivirus

3. Click OK.
The rule is deleted.

Configuring VStream Advanced Settings

To configure VStream Antivirus advanced settings


1. Click Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Advanced tab.
The Advanced Antivirus Settings page appears.

2. Complete the fields using the table below.


3. Click Apply.
4. To restore the default VStream Antivirus settings, do the following:
a) Click Default.
A confirmation message appears.
b) Click OK.

Chapter 10: Using VStream Antivirus 281


Configuring VStream Antivirus

The VStream Antivirus settings are reset to their defaults. For information on
the default values, refer to the table below.

Table 61: Advanced Antivirus Settings Fields

In this field… Do this…

File Types

Block potentially unsafe Select this option to block all emails containing potentially unsafe
file types in email attachments.
messages
Unsafe file types are:

• DOS/Windows executables, libraries and drivers


• Compiled HTML Help files
• VBScript files
• Files with {CLSID} in their name
• The following file extensions: ade, adp, bas, bat, chm,
cmd,com, cpl, crt, exe, hlp, hta, inf, ins, isp, js, jse,
lnk, mdb, mde, msc, msi, msp, mst, pcd, pif, reg, scr,
sct, shs,shb, url, vb, vbe, vbs, wsc, wsf, wsh.

282 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring VStream Antivirus

In this field… Do this…

Pass safe file types Select this option to accept common file types that are known to
without scanning be safe, without scanning them.

Safe files types are:

• MPEG streams
• RIFF Ogg Stream
• MP3
• PDF
• PostScript
• WMA/WMV/ASF
• RealMedia
• JPEG - only the header is scanned, and the rest of
the file is skipped

Selecting this option reduces the load on the gateway by skipping


safe file types. This option is selected by default.

Status

Maximum nesting level Type the maximum number of nested content levels that
VStream Antivirus should scan.

Setting a higher number increases security. Setting a lower


number prevents attackers from overloading the gateway by
sending extremely nested archive files.

The default value is 5 levels.

Chapter 10: Using VStream Antivirus 283


Configuring VStream Antivirus

In this field… Do this…

Maximum compression Fill in the field to complete the maximum compression ratio of
ratio 1:x files that VStream Antivirus should scan.

For example, to specify a 1:150 maximum compression ratio,


type 150.

Setting a higher number allows the scanning of highly


compressed files, but creates a potential for highly compressible
files to create a heavy load on the appliance. Setting a lower
number prevents attackers from overloading the gateway by
sending extremely compressible files.

The default value is 100.

When archived file Specify how VStream Antivirus should handle files that exceed
exceeds limit or extraction the Maximum nesting level or the Maximum compression ratio, and
fails files for which scanning fails. Select one of the following:

• Pass file without scanning. Scan only the number of


levels specified, and skip the scanning of more deeply
nested archives. Furthermore, skip scanning highly
compressible files, and skip scanning archives that
cannot be extracted because they are corrupt. This is
the default.
• Block file. Block the file.

When a password- VStream Antivirus cannot extract and scan password-protected


protected file is found in files inside archive. Specify how VStream Antivirus should handle
archive such files, by selecting one of the following:

• Pass file without scanning. Accept the file without


scanning it. This is the default.
• Block file. Block the file.

284 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Updating VStream Antivirus

Updating VStream Antivirus

When you are subscribed to the VStream Antivirus updates service, VStream
Antivirus virus signatures are automatically updated, keeping security up-to-date
with no need for user intervention. However, you can still check for updates
manually, if needed.

To update the VStream Antivirus virus signature database


1. Click Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Antivirus tab.
The VStream Antivirus page appears.
2. Click Update Now.
The VStream Antivirus database is updated with the latest virus signatures.

Chapter 10: Using VStream Antivirus 285


Updating VStream Antivirus

Chapter 11

SMART Management and Subscription


Services
You can integrate all VPN-1 Edge appliances into an overall enterprise security
policy for maximum security. Check Point's Security Management Architecture
(SMART) delivers a single enterprise-wide security policy that you can centrally
manage and automatically deploy to an unlimited number of VPN-1 Edge
gateways.
Alternatively, you can subscribe to security services available from select service
providers, including firewall security updates, Web filtering, and dynamic DNS.
Business users can use the VPN-1 Edge appliance to securely connect to the office
network.
This chapter explains how to connect your appliance to SMART management or to
managed subscription services.

Note: Although some procedures in this chapter specifically


relate to managed security services, you can use these same
procedures to connect to and use SMART management.

This chapter includes the following topics:


Connecting to a Service Center ............................................................... 288
Viewing Services Information ................................................................. 293
Refreshing Your Service Center Connection........................................... 294
Configuring Your Account ...................................................................... 294
Disconnecting from Your Service Center................................................ 295
Web Filtering........................................................................................... 296
Email Filtering......................................................................................... 300
Automatic and Manual Updates .............................................................. 304

Chapter 11: SMART Management and Subscription Services 287


Connecting to a Service Center

Connecting to a Service Center

To connect to a Service Center


1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Account tab.
The Account page appears.

2. In the Service Account area, click Connect.

288 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Connecting to a Service Center

The VPN-1 Edge Services Wizard opens, with the Service Center dialog box
displayed.

3. Make sure the Connect to a different Service Center check box is selected.
4. Do one of the following:
• To connect to the SofaWare Service Center, choose
usercenter.sofaware.com.
• To specify a Service Center, choose Specified IP and then in the Specified
IP field, enter the desired Service Center’s IP address, as given to you by
your system administrator.
5. Click Next.
• The Connecting… screen appears.

Chapter 11: SMART Management and Subscription Services 289


Connecting to a Service Center

• If the Service Center requires authentication, the Service Center Login


dialog box appears.

Enter your gateway ID and registration key in the appropriate fields, as given
to you by your service provider, then click Next.
• The Connecting… screen appears.
• The Confirmation dialog box appears with a list of services to which you
are subscribed.

6. Click Next.

290 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Connecting to a Service Center

The Done screen appears with a success message.

7. Click Finish.
The following things happen:
• If a new firmware is available, the VPN-1 Edge appliance may start
downloading it. This may take several minutes. Once the download is
complete, the VPN-1 Edge appliance restarts using the new firmware.
• The Welcome page appears.

Chapter 11: SMART Management and Subscription Services 291


Connecting to a Service Center

• The services to which you are subscribed are now available on your VPN-
1 Edge appliance and listed as such on the Account page. See Viewing
Services Information on page 293 for further information.

• The Services submenu includes the services to which you are subscribed.

292 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing Services Information

Viewing Services Information

The Account page displays the following information about your subscription.

Table 62: Account Page Fields

This field… Displays…

Service Center The name of the Service Center to which you are connected (if known).
Name

Gateway ID Your gateway ID.

Subscription will The date on which your subscription to services will end.
end on

Service The services available in your service plan.

Subscription The status of your subscription to each service:

• Subscribed
• Not Subscribed

Status The status of each service:

• Connected. You are connected to the service through the


Service Center.
• Connecting. Connecting to the Service Center.
• N/A. The service is not available.

Chapter 11: SMART Management and Subscription Services 293


Refreshing Your Service Center Connection

This field… Displays…

Information The mode to which each service is set.

If you are subscribed to Dynamic DNS, this field displays your gateway's
domain name.

For further information, see Web Filtering on page 296, Virus Scanning
on page 300, and Automatic and Manual Updates on page 304.

Refreshing Your Service Center Connection

This option restarts your VPN-1 Edge appliance’s connection to the Service Center
and refreshes your VPN-1 Edge appliance’s service settings.

To refresh your Service Center connection


1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Account tab.
The Account page appears.
2. In the Service Account area, click Refresh.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance reconnects to the Service Center.
Your service settings are refreshed.

Configuring Your Account

This option allows you to access your Service Center's Web site, which may offer
additional configuration options for your account. Contact your Service Center for
a user ID and password.

294 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Disconnecting from Your Service Center

To configure your account


1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Account tab.
The Account page appears.
2. In the Service Account area, click Configure.

Note: If no additional settings are available from your Service Center, this button will
not appear.

Your Service Center's Web site opens.


3. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Disconnecting from Your Service Center

If desired, you can disconnect from your Service Center.

To disconnect from your Service Center


1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Account tab.
The Account page appears.
2. In the Service Account area, click Connect.
The VPN-1 Edge Services Wizard opens, with the first Subscription Services
dialog box displayed.
3. Clear the Connect to a different Service Center check box.
4. Click Next.
The Done screen appears with a success message.
5. Click Finish.
The following things happen:
• You are disconnected from the Service Center.

Chapter 11: SMART Management and Subscription Services 295


Web Filtering

• The services to which you were subscribed are no longer available on


your VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Web Filtering
When the Web Filtering service is enabled, access to Web content is restricted
according to the categories specified under Allow Categories. Authorized users will
be able to view Web pages with no restrictions, only after they have provided the
administrator password via the Web Filtering pop-up window.

Note: Web Filtering is only available if you are connected to a Service Center and
subscribed to this service.

Enabling/Disabling Web Filtering

Note: If you are remotely managed, contact your Service Center to change these
settings.

To enable/disable Web Filtering


1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Web Filtering tab.

296 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Web Filtering

The Web Filtering page appears.

2. Drag the On/Off lever upwards or downwards.


Web Filtering is enabled/disabled.

Selecting Categories for Blocking

You can define which types of Web sites should be considered appropriate for your
family or office members, by selecting the categories. Categories marked with
will remain visible, while categories marked with will be blocked and will
require the administrator password for viewing.

Note: If you are remotely managed, contact your Service Center to change these
settings.

Chapter 11: SMART Management and Subscription Services 297


Web Filtering

To allow/block a category

• In the Allow Categories area, click or next to the desired category.

Temporarily Disabling Web Filtering

If desired, you can temporarily disable the Web Filtering service.

To temporarily disable Web Filtering


1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Web Filtering tab.
The Web Filtering page appears.
2. Click Snooze.
• Web Filtering is temporarily disabled for all internal network computers.

298 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Web Filtering

• The Snooze button changes to Resume.

• The Web Filtering Off popup window opens.

3. To re-enable the service, click Resume, either in the popup window, or on the
Web Filtering page.
• The service is re-enabled for all internal network computers.
• If you clicked Resume in the Web Filtering page, the button changes to
Snooze.

Chapter 11: SMART Management and Subscription Services 299


Email Filtering

• If you clicked Resume in the Web Filtering Off popup window, the popup
window closes.

Email Filtering
There are two Email Filtering services:
• Email Antivirus
When the Email Antivirus service is enabled, your email is automatically
scanned for the detection and elimination of all known viruses and vandals. If a
virus is detected, it is removed and replaced with a warning message.

Note: The Email Antivirus subscription service differs from VStream Antivirus in the
following ways:

• Email Antivirus is centralized, redirecting traffic through the Service


Center for scanning, while VStream Antivirus scans for viruses in the
VPN-1 Edge gateway itself.
• Email Antivirus is specific to email, scanning incoming POP3 and
outgoing SMTP connections only, while VStream Antivirus supports
additional protocols, including incoming SMTP and outgoing POP3
connections.

You can use either antivirus solution or both in conjunction. For information on
VStream Antivirus, see Using VStream Antivirus on page 269.

• Email Antispam
When the Email Antispam service is enabled, your email is automatically
scanned for the detection of spam. If spam is detected, the email’s Subject line is
modified to indicate that it is suspected spam. You can create rules to divert
such messages to a special folder.

Note: Email Filtering services are only available if you are connected to a Service
Center and subscribed to the services.

300 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Email Filtering

Enabling/Disabling Email Filtering

Note: If you are remotely managed, contact your Service Center to change these
settings.

To enable/disable Email Filtering


1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Email Filtering tab.
The Email Filtering page appears.

2. Next to Email Antivirus, drag the On/Off lever upwards or downwards.


Email Antivirus is enabled/disabled.
3. Next to Email Antispam, drag the On/Off lever upwards or downwards.
Email Antispam is enabled/disabled.

Chapter 11: SMART Management and Subscription Services 301


Email Filtering

Selecting Protocols for Scanning

If you are locally managed, you can define which protocols should be scanned for
viruses and spam:
• Email retrieving (POP3). If enabled, all incoming email in the POP3
protocol will be scanned.
• Email sending (SMTP). If enabled, all outgoing email will be scanned.
Protocols marked with will be scanned, while those marked with will not.

Note: If you are remotely managed, contact your Service Center to change these
settings.

To enable virus and spam scanning for a protocol

• In the Options area, click or next to the desired protocol.

Temporarily Disabling Email Filtering

If you are having problems sending or receiving email you can temporarily disable
the Email Filtering services.

To temporarily disable Email Filtering


1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Email Filtering tab.
The Email Filtering page appears.
2. Click Snooze.
• Email Antivirus and Email Antispam are temporarily disabled for all
internal network computers.

302 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Email Filtering

• The Snooze button changes to Resume.

• The Email Filtering Off popup window opens.

3. To re-enable Email Antivirus and Email Antispam, click Resume, either in the
popup window, or on the Email Filtering page.
• The services are re-enabled for all internal network computers.
• If you clicked Resume in the Email Filtering page, the button changes to
Snooze.
• If you clicked Resume in the Email Filtering Off popup window, the popup
window closes.

Chapter 11: SMART Management and Subscription Services 303


Automatic and Manual Updates

Automatic and Manual Updates


The Software Updates service enables you to check for new security and software
updates.

Note: Software Updates are only available if you are connected to a Service Center
and subscribed to this service.

Checking for Software Updates when Locally Managed

If your VPN-1 Edge appliance is locally managed, you can set it to automatically
check for software updates, or you can set it so that software updates must be
checked for manually.

To configure software updates when locally managed


1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Software Updates tab.
The Software Updates page appears.

304 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Automatic and Manual Updates

2. To set the VPN-1 Edge appliance to automatically check for and install new
software updates, drag the Automatic/Manual lever upwards.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance checks for new updates and installs them according
to its schedule.

Note: When the Software Updates service is set to Automatic, you can still manually
check for updates.

3. To set the VPN-1 Edge appliance so that software updates must be checked for
manually, drag the Automatic/Manual lever downwards.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance does not check for software updates automatically.
4. To manually check for software updates, click Update Now.
The system checks for new updates and installs them.

Checking for Software Updates when Remotely Managed

If your VPN-1 Edge appliance is remotely managed, it automatically checks for


software updates and installs them without user intervention. However, you can
still check for updates manually, if needed.

To manually check for security and software updates


1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Software Updates tab.

Chapter 11: SMART Management and Subscription Services 305


Automatic and Manual Updates

The Software Updates page appears.

2. Click Update Now.


The system checks for new updates and installs them.

306 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Automatic and Manual Updates

Chapter 12

Working with VPNs


This chapter describes how to use your VPN-1 Edge appliance as a Remote Access
VPN Client, VPN server, or VPN gateway.
Note: For maximum security, you can integrate all
VPN-1 Edge appliances into an overall enterprise
security policy. Check Point's Security
Management Architecture (SMART) delivers a
single enterprise-wide security policy that you can
centrally manage and automatically deploy to an
unlimited number of VPN-1 Edge gateways.
This chapter does not discuss creating and
managing VPNs using SMART management tools.
For more information on connecting and managing
VPNs using SMART management tools, refer to
your SmartCenter documentation.
Note: To connect an appliance to a Check Point
SMART management server, you must connect the
appliance to the Service Center using the Services
page Connect tab.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 307


Overview

This chapter includes the following topics:


Overview ................................................................................................. 308
Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server..................... 314
Adding and Editing VPN Sites ............................................................... 319
Deleting a VPN Site ................................................................................ 351
Enabling/Disabling a VPN Site ............................................................... 352
Logging on to a Remote Access VPN Site .............................................. 353
Logging off a Remote Access VPN Site.................................................. 357
Installing a Certificate.............................................................................. 357
Uninstalling a Certificate......................................................................... 364
Viewing VPN Tunnels............................................................................. 365
Viewing IKE Traces for VPN Connections............................................. 368

Overview
You can configure your VPN-1 Edge appliance as part of a virtual private network
(VPN). A VPN is a private data network consisting of a group of gateways that can
securely connect to each other. Each member of the VPN is called a VPN site, and
a connection between two VPN sites is called a VPN tunnel. VPN tunnels encrypt
and authenticate all traffic passing through them. Through these tunnels, employees
can safely use their company’s network resources when working at home. For
example, they can securely read email, use the company’s intranet, or access the
company’s database from home.
The are four types of VPN sites:

308 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Overview

• Remote Access VPN Server. Makes a network remotely available to


authorized users, who connect to the Remote Access VPN Server using the
Check Point SecuRemote VPN Client, provided for free with your VPN-1
Edge, or from another VPN-1 Edge.
• Internal VPN Server. SecuRemote can also be used from your internal
networks, allowing you to secure your wired or wireless network with
strong encryption and authentication.
• Site-to-Site VPN Gateway. Can connect with another Site-to-Site VPN
Gateway in a permanent, bi-directional relationship.
• Remote Access VPN Client. Can connect to a Remote Access VPN Server,
but other VPN sites cannot initiate a connection to the Remote Access
VPN Client. Defining a Remote Access VPN Client is a hardware
alternative to using SecuRemote software.
Both VPN-1 Edge series provide VPN functionality. The VPN-1 Edge appliance
can act as a Remote Access VPN Client, a VPN Server, or a Site-to-Site VPN
Gateway.
A virtual private network (VPN) must include at least one Remote Access VPN
Server or gateway. The type of VPN sites you include in a VPN depends on the
type of VPN you want to create, Site-to-Site or Remote Access.

Note: A locally managed VPN Server or gateway must have a


static IP address. If you need a VPN Server or gateway with a
dynamic IP address, you must use either Check Point SMART
management or SofaWare Security Management Portal (SMP)
management.

A SecuRemote or VPN-1 Edge Remote Access VPN Client can


have a dynamic IP address, regardless of whether it is locally or
remotely managed.

Note: This chapter explains how to define a VPN locally.


However, if your appliance is centrally managed by a Service
Center, then the Service Center can automatically deploy VPN
configuration for your appliance.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 309


Overview

Site-to-Site VPNs
A Site-to-Site VPN consists of two or more Site-to-Site VPN Gateways that can
communicate with each other in a bi-directional relationship. The connected
networks function as a single network. You can use this type of VPN to mesh
office branches into one corporate network.

Figure 11: Site-to-Site VPN

310 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Overview

To create a Site-to-Site VPN with two VPN sites


1. On the first VPN site’s VPN-1 Edge appliance, do the following:
a. Define the second VPN site as a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway, or create
a PPPoE tunnel to the second VPN site, using the procedure Adding
and Editing VPN Sites on page 319.
b. Enable the Remote Access VPN Server using the procedure Setting
Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a Remote Access VPN Server on
page 314.
2. On the second VPN site’s VPN-1 Edge appliance, do the following:
a. Define the first VPN site as a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway, or create a
PPPoE tunnel to the first VPN site, using the procedure Adding and
Editing VPN Sites on page 319.
b. Then enable the Remote Access VPN Server using the procedure
Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a Remote Access VPN
Server on page 314.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 311


Overview

Remote Access VPNs


A Remote Access VPN consists of one Remote Access VPN Server or Site-to-Site
VPN Gateway, and one or more Remote Access VPN Clients. You can use this
type of VPN to make an office network remotely available to authorized users,
such as employees working from home, who connect to the office Remote Access
VPN Server with their Remote Access VPN Clients.

Figure 12: Remote Access VPN

312 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Overview

To create a Remote Access VPN with two VPN sites


1. On the remote user VPN site's VPN-1 Edge appliance, add the office Remote
Access VPN Server as a Remote Access VPN site.
See Adding and Editing VPN Sites on page 319.
The remote user's VPN-1 Edge appliance will act as a Remote Access VPN
Client.
2. On the office VPN site's VPN-1 Edge appliance, enable the Remote Access
VPN Server.
See Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a Remote Access VPN Server
on page 314.

Internal VPN Server


You can use your VPN-1 Edge appliance as an internal VPN Server, for enhanced
wired and wireless security. When the internal VPN Server is enabled, internal
network PCs and PDAs with SecuRemote VPN Client software installed can
establish a Remote Access VPN session to the gateway. This means that
connections from internal network users to the gateway can be encrypted and
authenticated.
The benefits of using the internal VPN Server are two-fold:
• Accessibility
Using SecuRemote, you can enjoy a secure connection from anywhere—in your
wireless network or on the road—without changing any settings. The standard is
completely transparent and allows you to access company resources the same
way, whether you are sitting at your desk or anywhere else.
• Security
Many of today's attacks are increasingly introduced from inside the network.
Internal security threats cause outages, downtime, and lost revenue. Wired
networks that deal with highly sensitive information—especially networks in
public places, such as classrooms—are vulnerable to users trying to hack the
internal network.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 313


Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server

Using the internal VPN Server, along with a strict security policy for non-VPN
users, can enhance security both for wired networks and for wireless networks,
which are particularly vulnerable to security breaches.
The internal VPN Server can be used in the VPN-1 Edge W wireless appliance,
regardless of the wireless security settings. It also can be used in wired appliances,
both for wired stations and for wireless stations.

Note: You can enable wireless connections to a wired VPN-1 Edge appliance, by
connecting a wireless access point in bridge mode to one of the appliance's internal
interfaces. Do not connect computers to the same interface as a wireless access
point, since allowing direct access from the wireless network may pose a significant
security risk.

For information on setting up your VPN-1 Edge appliance as an internal VPN


Server, see Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server on page
314.

Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN


Server

You can make your network available to authorized users connecting from the
Internet or from your internal networks, by setting up your VPN-1 Edge appliance
as a VPN Server. Users can connect to the VPN Server via Check Point
SecuRemote or via a VPN-1 Edge appliance in Remote Access VPN mode.
Enabling the VPN Server for users connecting from your internal networks adds a
layer of security to such connections. For example, while you could create a
firewall rule allowing a specific user on the DMZ to access the LAN, enabling
VPN access for the user means that such connections can be encrypted and
authenticated. For more information, see Internal VPN Server on page 313.

314 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server

To set up your VPN-1 Edge appliance as a VPN Server


1. Configure the VPN Server in one or more of the following ways:
• To accept remote access connections from the Internet.
See Configuring the Remote Access VPN Server on page 316.
• To accept connections from your internal networks.
See Configuring the Internal VPN Server on page 317.
2. If you configured the internal VPN Server, install SecuRemote on the desired
internal network computers.
See Installing SecuRemote on page 319.
3. Set up remote VPN access for users.
See Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users on page 380.

Note: Disabling the VPN Server for a specific type of connection (from the Internet or
from internal networks) will cause all existing VPN tunnels of that type to
disconnect.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 315


Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server

Configuring the Remote Access VPN Server

To configure the Remote Access VPN Server


1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Server tab.
The SecuRemote VPN Server page appears.

2. Select the Allow SecuRemote users to connect from the Internet check box.

316 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server

New check boxes appear.

3. To allow authenticated users connecting from the Internet to bypass NAT when
connecting to your internal network, select the Bypass NAT check box.
4. To allow authenticated users connecting from the Internet to bypass the firewall
and access your internal network without restriction, select the Bypass the
firewall check box.
5. Click Apply.
The Remote Access VPN Server is enabled for the specified connection types.

Configuring the Internal VPN Server

To configure the internal VPN Server


1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Server tab.
The SecuRemote VPN Server page appears.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 317


Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server

2. Select the Allow SecuRemote users to connect from my internal networks check
box.
New check boxes appear.

3. To allow authenticated users connecting from internal networks to bypass the


firewall and access your internal network without restriction, select the Bypass
the firewall check box.
Bypass NAT is always enabled for the internal VPN server, and cannot be
disabled.
4. Click Apply.
The internal VPN Server is enabled for the specified connection types.

318 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

Installing SecuRemote

If you configured the Remote Access VPN Server to accept connections from your
internal networks, you must install the SecuRemote VPN Client on internal
network computers that should be allowed to remotely access your network.

To install SecuRemote
1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Server tab.
The SecuRemote VPN Server page appears.
2. Click the Download SecuRemote VPN client link.
The VPN-1 SecuRemote for VPN-1 Edge page opens in a new window.
3. Follow the online instructions to complete installation.
SecuRemote is installed.
For information on using SecuRemote, see the User Help. To access
SecuRemote User Help, right-click on the SecuRemote VPN Client icon in the
taskbar, select Settings, and then click Help.

Adding and Editing VPN Sites

To add or edit VPN sites


1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Sites tab.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 319


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

The VPN Sites page appears with a list of VPN sites.

2. Do one of the following:


• To add a VPN site, click New Site.
• To edit a VPN site, click Edit in the desired VPN site’s row.

320 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

The VPN-1 Edge VPN Site Wizard opens, with the Welcome to the VPN Site Wizard
dialog box displayed.

3. Do one of the following:


• Select Remote Access VPN to establish remote access from your Remote
Access VPN Client to a Remote Access VPN Server.
• Select Site-to-Site VPN to create a permanent bi-directional connection to
another Site-to-Site VPN Gateway.
4. Click Next.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 321


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

Configuring a Remote Access VPN Site


If you selected Remote Access VPN, the VPN Gateway Address dialog box appears.

1. Enter the IP address of the Remote Access VPN Server to which you want to
connect, as given to you by the network administrator.
2. To allow the VPN site to bypass the firewall and access your internal network
without restriction, select the Bypass the firewall check box.
3. Click Next.

322 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

The VPN Network Configuration dialog box appears.

4. Specify how you want to obtain the VPN network configuration. Refer to VPN
Network Configuration Fields on page 331.
5. Click Next.
The following things happen in the order below:
• If you chose Specify Configuration, a second VPN Network Configuration
dialog box appears.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 323


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

Complete the fields using the information in VPN Network Configuration


Fields on page 331 and click Next.
• The Authentication Method dialog box appears.

6. Complete the fields using the information in Authentication Methods Fields on


page 333.
7. Click Next.

324 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

Username and Password Authentication Method


If you selected Username and Password, the VPN Login dialog box appears.

1. Complete the fields using the information in VPN Login Fields on page 333.
2. Click Next.
• If you selected Automatic Login, the Connect dialog box appears.

Do the following:

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 325


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

1) To try to connect to the Remote Access VPN Server, select the Try
to Connect to the VPN Gateway check box.
This allows you to test the VPN connection.
Warning: If you try to connect to the VPN site before completing the wizard, all
existing tunnels will be terminated.

2) Click Next.
If you selected Try to Connect to the VPN Gateway, the Connecting…
screen appears, and then the Contacting VPN Site screen appears.
• The Site Name dialog box appears.

3. Enter a name for the VPN site.


You may choose any name.
4. Click Next.

326 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

The VPN Site Created screen appears.

5. Click Finish.
The VPN Sites page reappears. If you added a VPN site, the new site appears in
the VPN Sites list. If you edited a VPN site, the modifications are reflected in the
VPN Sites list.

Certificate Authentication Method


If you selected Certificate, the Connect dialog box appears.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 327


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

1. To try to connect to the Remote Access VPN Server, select the Try to Connect to
the VPN Gateway check box.
This allows you to test the VPN connection.

Warning: If you try to connect to the VPN site before completing the wizard, all
existing tunnels will be terminated.

2. Click Next.
If you selected Try to Connect to the VPN Gateway, the Connecting… screen
appears, and then the Contacting VPN Site screen appears.
The Site Name dialog box appears.

3. Enter a name for the VPN site.


You may choose any name.
4. Click Next.

328 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

The VPN Site Created screen appears.

5. Click Finish.
The VPN Sites page reappears. If you added a VPN site, the new site appears in
the VPN Sites list. If you edited a VPN site, the modifications are reflected in the
VPN Sites list.

RSA SecurID Authentication Method


If you selected RSA SecurID, the Site Name dialog box appears.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 329


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

1. Enter a name for the VPN site.


You may choose any name.
2. Click Next.
The VPN Site Created screen appears.

3. Click Finish.
The VPN Sites page reappears. If you added a VPN site, the new site appears in
the VPN Sites list. If you edited a VPN site, the modifications are reflected in the
VPN Sites list.

330 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

Table 63: VPN Network Configuration Fields

In this field… Do this…

Download Click this option to obtain the network configuration by downloading it from
Configuration the VPN site.

This option will automatically configure your VPN settings, by downloading


the network topology definition from the Remote Access VPN Server.

Note: Downloading the network configuration is only possible if you are


connecting to a Check Point VPN-1 or VPN-1 Edge Site-to-Site VPN
Gateway.

Specify Click this option to provide the network configuration manually.


Configuration

Route All Traffic Click this option to route all network traffic through the VPN site.

For example, if your VPN consists of a central office and a number of


remote offices, and the remote offices are only allowed to access Internet
resources through the central office, you can choose to route all traffic from
the remote offices through the central office.

Note: You can only configure one VPN site to route all traffic.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 331


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

In this field… Do this…

Route Based VPN Click this option to create a virtual tunnel interface (VTI) for this site, so
that it can participate in a route-based VPN.

Route-based VPNs allow routing connections over VPN tunnels, so that


remote VPN sites can participate in dynamic or static routing schemes.
This improves network and VPN management efficiency for large
networks.

For constantly changing networks, it is recommended to use a route-based


VPN combined with OSPF dynamic routing. This enables you to make
frequent changes to the network topology, such as adding an internal
network, without having to reconfigure static routes.

OSPF is enabled using CLI. For information on using CLI, see Controlling
the Appliance via the Command Line on page 400. For information on
the relevant commands for OSPF, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI
Reference Guide.

This option is only available for when configuring a Site-to-Site VPN


gateway.

Destination network Type up to three destination network addresses at the VPN site to which
you want to connect.

Subnet mask Select the subnet masks for the destination network addresses.

Note: Obtain the destination networks and subnet masks from the VPN
site’s system administrator.

Backup Gateway Type the name of the VPN site to use if the primary VPN site fails.

332 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

Table 64: Authentication Methods Fields

In this field… Do this…

Username and Select this option to use a user name and password for VPN
Password authentication.

In the next step, you can specify whether you want to log on to the VPN
site automatically or manually.

Certificate Select this option to use a certificate for VPN authentication.

If you select this option, a certificate must have been installed. (Refer to
Installing a Certificate on page 357 for more information about
certificates and instructions on how to install a certificate.)

RSA SecurID Select this option to use an RSA SecurID token for VPN authentication.
Token
When authenticating to the VPN site, you must enter a four-digit PIN code
and the SecurID passcode shown in your SecurID token's display. The
RSA SecurID token generates a new passcode every minute.

SecurID is only supported in Remote Access manual login mode.

Table 65: VPN Login Fields

In this field… Do this…

Manual Login Click this option to configure the site for Manual Login.

Manual Login connects only the computer you are currently logged onto to
the VPN site, and only when the appropriate user name and password
have been entered. For further information on Automatic and Manual
Login, see, Logging on to a VPN Site on page 353.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 333


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

In this field… Do this…

Automatic Login Click this option to enable the VPN-1 Edge appliance to log on to the VPN
site automatically.

You must then fill in the Username and Password fields.

Automatic Login provides all the computers on your internal network with
constant access to the VPN site. For further information on Automatic and
Manual Login, see Logging on to a VPN Site on page 353.

Username Type the user name to be used for logging on to the VPN site.

Password Type the password to be used for logging on to the VPN site.

334 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

Configuring a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway


If you selected Site-to-Site VPN, the VPN Gateway Address dialog box appears.

1. Complete the fields using the information in VPN Gateway Address Fields on
page 346.
2. Click Next.
The VPN Network Configuration dialog box appears.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 335


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

3. Specify how you want to obtain the VPN network configuration. Refer to VPN
Network Configuration Fields on page 331.
4. Click Next.
• If you chose Specify Configuration, a second VPN Network Configuration
dialog box appears.

Complete the fields using the information in VPN Network Configuration


Fields on page 331, and then click Next.

336 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

• If you chose Route Based VPN, the Route Based VPN dialog box appears.

Complete the fields using the information in Route Based VPN Fields on
page 347, and then click Next.
• The Authentication Method dialog box appears.

5. Complete the fields using the information in Authentication Methods Fields on


page 348.
6. Click Next.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 337


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

Shared Secret Authentication Method


If you selected Shared Secret, the Authentication dialog box appears.

If you chose Download Configuration, the dialog box contains additional fields.

1. Complete the fields using the information in VPN Authentication Fields on


page 348 and click Next.

338 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

The Security Methods dialog box appears.

2. To configure advanced security settings, click Show Advanced Settings.


New fields appear.

3. Complete the fields using the information in Security Methods Fields on page
348 and click Next.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 339


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

The Connect dialog box appears.

4. To try to connect to the Remote Access VPN Server, select the Try to Connect to
the VPN Gateway check box.
This allows you to test the VPN connection.

Warning: If you try to connect to the VPN site before completing the wizard, all
existing tunnels will be terminated.

5. Click Next.
• If you selected Try to Connect to the VPN Gateway, the Connecting…
screen appears, and then the Contacting VPN Site screen appears.

340 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

• The Site Name dialog box appears.

6. Enter a name for the VPN site.


You may choose any name.
7. To keep the tunnel to the VPN site alive even if there is no network traffic
between the VPN-1 Edge appliance and the VPN site, select Keep this site alive.
8. Click Next.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 341


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

• If you selected Keep this site alive, and previously you chose Download
Configuration, the "Keep Alive" Configuration dialog box appears.

Do the following:
1) Type up to three IP addresses which the VPN-1 Edge appliance
should ping in order to keep the tunnel to the VPN site alive.
2) Click Next.
• The VPN Site Created screen appears.
9. Click Finish.
The VPN Sites page reappears. If you added a VPN site, the new site appears in
the VPN Sites list. If you edited a VPN site, the modifications are reflected in the
VPN Sites list.

342 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

Certificate Authentication Method


If you selected Certificate, the following things happen:
• If you chose Download Configuration, the Authentication dialog box
appears.

Complete the fields using the information in VPN Authentication Fields on


page 348 and click Next.
• The Security Methods dialog box appears.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 343


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

1. To configure advanced security settings, click Show Advanced Settings.


New fields appear.

2. Complete the fields using the information in Security Methods Fields on page
348 and click Next.
The Connect dialog box appears.

3. To try to connect to the Remote Access VPN Server, select the Try to Connect to
the VPN Gateway check box.

344 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

This allows you to test the VPN connection.

Warning: If you try to connect to the VPN site before completing the wizard, all
existing tunnels will be terminated.

4. Click Next.
• If you selected Try to Connect to the VPN Gateway, the following things
happen:
The Connecting… screen appears.
• The Contacting VPN Site screen appears.
• The Site Name dialog box appears.

5. Enter a name for the VPN site.


You may choose any name.
6. To keep the tunnel to the VPN site alive even if there is no network traffic
between the VPN-1 Edge appliance and the VPN site, select Keep this site alive.
7. Click Next.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 345


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

• If you selected Keep this site alive, and previously you chose Download
Configuration, the "Keep Alive" Configuration dialog box appears.

Do the following:
1) Type up to three IP addresses which the VPN-1 Edge appliance
should ping in order to keep the tunnel to the VPN site alive.
2) Click Next.
• The VPN Site Created screen appears.
8. Click Finish.
The VPN Sites page reappears. If you added a VPN site, the new site appears in
the VPN Sites list. If you edited a VPN site, the modifications are reflected in the
VPN Sites list.

346 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

Table 66: VPN Gateway Address Fields

In this field… Do this…

Gateway Address Type the IP address of the Site-to-Site VPN Gateway to which you want
to connect, as given to you by the network administrator.

Bypass NAT Select this option to allow the VPN site to bypass NAT when connecting
to your internal network.

This option is selected by default.

Bypass the Select this option to allow the VPN site to bypass the firewall and access
firewall your internal network without restriction.

Table 67: Route Based VPN Fields

In this field… Do this…

Tunnel Local IP Type a local IP address for this end of the VPN tunnel.

Tunnel Remote IP Type the IP address of the remote end of the VPN tunnel.

OSPF Cost Type the cost of this link for dynamic routing purposes.

The default value is 10.

If OSPF is not enabled, this setting is not used. OSPF is enabled using
the VPN-1 Edge command line interface (CLI). For information on using
CLI, see Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line on page
400. For information on the relevant commands for OSPF, refer to the
Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 347


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

Table 68: Authentication Methods Fields

In this field… Do this…

Shared Secret Select this option to use a shared secret for VPN authentication.

A shared secret is a string used to identify VPN sites to each other.

Certificate Select this option to use a certificate for VPN authentication.

If you select this option, a certificate must have been installed. (Refer to
Installing a Certificate on page 357 for more information about
certificates and instructions on how to install a certificate.)

Table 69: VPN Authentication Fields

In this field… Do this…

Topology User Type the topology user’s user name.

Topology Type the topology user’s password.


Password

Use Shared Type the shared secret to use for secure communications with the VPN
Secret site.

This shared secret is a string used to identify the VPN sites to each other.
The secret can contain spaces and special characters.

348 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

Table 70: Security Methods Fields

In this field… Do this…

Phase 1

Security Methods Select the encryption and integrity algorithm to use for IKE negotiations:

• Automatic. The VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically selects


the best security methods supported by the site. This is the
default.
• A specific algorithm

Diffie-Hellman Select the Diffie-Hellman group to use:


group
• Automatic. The VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically selects a
group. This is the default.
• A specific group

A group with more bits ensures a stronger key but lowers performance.

Renegotiate every Type the interval in minutes between IKE Phase-1 key negotiations. This
is the IKE Phase-1 SA lifetime.

A shorter interval ensures higher security, but impacts heavily on


performance. Therefore, it is recommended to keep the SA lifetime
around its default value.

The default value is 1440 minutes (one day).

Phase 2

Security Methods Select the encryption and integrity algorithm to use for VPN traffic:

• Automatic. The VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically selects


the best security methods supported by the site. This is the
default.
• A specific algorithm

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 349


Adding and Editing VPN Sites

In this field… Do this…

Perfect Forward Specify whether to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS), by selecting
Secrecy one of the following:

• Enabled. PFS is enabled. The Diffie-Hellman group field is


enabled.
• Disabled. PFS is disabled. This is the default.

Enabling PFS will generate a new Diffie-Hellman key during IKE Phase 2
and renew the key for each key exchange.

PFS increases security but lowers performance. It is recommended to


enable PFS only in situations where extreme security is required.

Diffie-Hellman Select the Diffie-Hellman group to use:


group
• Automatic. The VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically selects a
group. This is the default.
• A specific group

A group with more bits ensures a stronger key but lowers performance.

Renegotiate every Type the interval in seconds between IPSec SA key negotiations. This is
the IKE Phase-2 SA lifetime.

A shorter interval ensures higher security.

The default value is 3600 seconds (one hour).

350 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Deleting a VPN Site

Deleting a VPN Site

To delete a VPN site


1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Sites tab.
The VPN Sites page appears, with a list of VPN sites.

2. In the desired VPN site’s row, click the Erase icon.


A confirmation message appears.
3. Click OK.
The VPN site is deleted.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 351


Enabling/Disabling a VPN Site

Enabling/Disabling a VPN Site

You can only connect to VPN sites that are enabled.

To enable/disable a VPN site


1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Sites tab.
The VPN Sites page appears, with a list of VPN sites.
2. To enable a VPN site, do the following:
a. Click the icon in the desired VPN site’s row.
A confirmation message appears.
b. Click OK.
The icon changes to , and the VPN site is enabled.
3. To disable a VPN site, do the following:

Note: Disabling a VPN site eliminates the tunnel and erases the network topology.

a. Click the icon in the desired VPN site’s row.


A confirmation message appears.
b. Click OK.
The icon changes to , and the VPN site is disabled.

352 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Logging on to a Remote Access VPN Site

Logging on to a Remote Access VPN Site

You need to manually log on to Remote Access VPN Servers configured for
Manual Login. You do not need to manually log on to a Remote Access VPN
Server configured for Automatic Login or a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway: all the
computers on your network have constant access to it.
Manual Login can be done through either the VPN-1 Edge Portal or the my.vpn
page. When you log on and traffic is sent to the VPN site, a VPN tunnel is
established. Only the computer from which you logged on can use the tunnel. To
share the tunnel with other computers in your home network, you must log on to
the VPN site from those computers, using the same user name and password.

Note: You must use a single user name and password for each VPN destination
gateway.

Logging on through the VPN-1 Edge Portal

Note: You can only login to sites that are configured for Manual Login.

To manually log on to a VPN site through the VPN-1 Edge Portal


1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Login tab.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 353


Logging on to a Remote Access VPN Site

The VPN Login page appears.

2. From the Site Name list, select the site to which you want to log on.

Note: Disabled VPN sites will not appear in the Site Name list.

3. Type your user name and password in the appropriate fields.


4. Click Login.
• If the VPN-1 Edge appliance is configured to automatically download the
network configuration, the VPN-1 Edge appliance downloads the network
configuration.
• If when adding the VPN site you specified a network configuration, the
VPN-1 Edge appliance attempts to create a tunnel to the VPN site.

354 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Logging on to a Remote Access VPN Site

• Once the VPN-1 Edge appliance has finished connecting, the VPN Login
Status box appears. The Status field displays “Connected”.

• The VPN Login Status box remains open until you manually log off the
VPN site.

Logging on through the my.vpn page

Note: You don’t need to know the my.firewall page administrator’s password in order
to use the my.vpn page.

To manually log on to a VPN site through the my.vpn page


1. Direct your Web browser to http://my.vpn

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 355


Logging on to a Remote Access VPN Site

The VPN Login screen appears.

2. In the Site Name list, select the site to which you want to log on.
3. Enter your user name and password in the appropriate fields.
4. Click Login.
• If the VPN-1 Edge appliance is configured to automatically download the
network configuration, the VPN-1 Edge appliance downloads the network
configuration.
• If when adding the VPN site you specified a network configuration, the
VPN-1 Edge appliance attempts to create a tunnel to the VPN site.
• The VPN Login Status box appears. The Status field tracks the
connection’s progress.
• Once the VPN-1 Edge appliance has finished connecting, the Status field
changes to “Connected”.
• The VPN Login Status box remains open until you manually log off of the
VPN site.

356 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Logging off a Remote Access VPN Site

Logging off a Remote Access VPN Site

You need to manually log off a VPN site, if it is a Remote Access VPN site
configured for Manual Login.

To log off a VPN site

• In the VPN Login Status box, click Logout.


All open tunnels from the VPN-1 Edge appliance to the VPN site are closed, and
the VPN Login Status box closes.

Note: Closing the browser or dismissing the VPN Login Status box will also terminate
the VPN session within a short time.

Installing a Certificate

A digital certificate is a secure means of authenticating the VPN-1 Edge appliance


to other Site-to-Site VPN Gateways. The certificate is issued by the Certificate
Authority (CA) to entities such as gateways, users, or computers. The entity then
uses the certificate to identify itself and provide verifiable information.
For instance, the certificate includes the Distinguished Name (DN) (identifying
information) of the entity, as well as the public key (information about itself). After
two entities exchange and validate each other's certificates, they can begin
encrypting information between themselves using the public keys in the
certificates.
The certificate also includes a fingerprint, a unique text used to identify the
certificate. You can email your certificate's fingerprint to the remote user. Upon
connecting to the VPN-1 Edge VPN Server for the first time, the entity should
check that the VPN peer's fingerprint displayed in the SecuRemote VPN Client is
identical to the fingerprint received.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 357


Installing a Certificate

The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports certificates encoded in the PKCS#12


(Personal Information Exchange Syntax Standard) format, and enables you to
install such certificates in the following ways:
• By generating a self-signed certificate.
See Generating a Self-Signed Certificate on page 358.
• By importing a certificate.
The PKCS#12 file you import must have a ".p12" file extension. If you do not
have such a PKCS#12 file, obtain one from your network security administrator.
See Importing a Certificate on page 362.

Note: To use certificates authentication, each VPN-1 Edge appliance should have a
unique certificate. Do not use the same certificate for more than one gateway.

Note: When the firewall is managed by SmartCenter, it


automatically downloads a certificate from SmartCenter, and
therefore there is no need to install one.

Generating a Self-Signed Certificate

To generate a self-signed certificate


1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the Certificate tab.

358 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Installing a Certificate

The Certificate page appears.

2. Click Install Certificate.


The VPN-1 Edge Certificate Wizard opens, with the Certificate Wizard dialog box
displayed.

3. Click Generate a self-signed security certificate for this gateway.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 359


Installing a Certificate

The Create Self-Signed Certificate dialog box appears.

4. Complete the fields using the information in the table below.


5. Click Next.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance generates the certificate. This may take a few
seconds.
The Done dialog box appears, displaying the certificate's details.

6. Click Finish.

360 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Installing a Certificate

The VPN-1 Edge appliance installs the certificate. If a certificate is already


installed, it is overwritten.
The Certificate Wizard closes.
The Certificates page displays the following information:
• The gateway's certificate
• The gateway's name
• The gateway certificate's fingerprint
• The CA's certificate
• The name of the CA that issued the certificate (in this case, the VPN-1
Edge gateway)
• The CA certificate's fingerprint
• The starting and ending dates between which the gateway's certificate and
the CA's certificate are valid

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 361


Installing a Certificate

Table 71: Certificate Fields

In this field… Do this…

Country Select your country from the drop-down list.

Organization Type the name of your organization.


Name

Organizational Unit Type the name of your division.

Gateway Name Type the gateway's name. This name will appear on the certificate, and will
be visible to remote users inspecting the certificate.

This field is filled in automatically with the gateway's MAC address. If


desired, you can change this to a more descriptive name.

Valid Until Use the drop-down lists to specify the month, day, and year when this
certificate should expire.

Note: You must renew the certificate when it expires.

Importing a Certificate

To install a certificate
1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the Certificate tab.
The Certificate page appears.
2. Click Install Certificate.
The VPN-1 Edge Certificate Wizard opens, with the Certificate Wizard dialog box
displayed.
3. Click Import a security certificate in PKCS#12 format.

362 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Installing a Certificate

The Import Certificate dialog box appears.

4. Click Browse to open a file browser from which to locate and select the file.
The filename that you selected is displayed.
5. Click Next.
The Import-Certificate Passphrase dialog box appears. This may take a few
moments.

6. Type the pass-phrase you received from the network security administrator.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 363


Uninstalling a Certificate

7. Click Next.
The Done dialog box appears, displaying the certificate's details.
8. Click Finish.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance installs the certificate. If a certificate is already
installed, it is overwritten.
The Certificate Wizard closes.
The Certificates page displays the following information:
• The gateway's certificate
• The gateway's name
• The gateway certificate's fingerprint
• The CA's certificate
• The name of the CA that issued the certificate
• The CA certificate's fingerprint
• The starting and ending dates between which the gateway's certificate and
the CA's certificate are valid

Uninstalling a Certificate

If you uninstall the certificate, no certificate will exist on the VPN-1 Edge
appliance, and you will not be able to connect to the VPN if a certificate is
required.
You cannot uninstall the certificate if there is a VPN site currently defined to use
certificate authentication.

Note: If you want to replace a currently-installed certificate, there is no need to


uninstall the certificate first. When you install the new certificate, the old certificate
will be overwritten.

364 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing VPN Tunnels

To uninstall a certificate
1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the Certificate tab.
The Certificate page appears with the name of the currently installed certificate.
2. Click Uninstall.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click OK.
The certificate is uninstalled.
A success message appears.
4. Click OK.

Viewing VPN Tunnels

You can view a list of currently established VPN tunnels. VPN tunnels are created
and closed as follows:
• Remote Access VPN sites configured for Automatic Login and Site-to-Site
VPN Gateways
A tunnel is created whenever your computer attempts any kind of
communication with a computer at the VPN site. The tunnel is closed when not
in use for a period of time.

Note: Although the VPN tunnel is automatically closed, the site remains open, and if
you attempt to communicate with the site, the tunnel will be reestablished.

• Remote Access VPN sites configured for Manual Login


A tunnel is created whenever your computer attempts any kind of
communication with a computer at the VPN site, after you have manually
logged on to the site. All open tunnels connecting to the site are closed when
you manually log off.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 365


Viewing VPN Tunnels

To view VPN tunnels


1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the VPN Tunnels tab.
The VPN Tunnels page appears with a table of open tunnels to VPN sites.

The VPN Tunnels page includes the information described in the table below.
2. To refresh the table, click Refresh.

Table 72: VPN Tunnels Page Fields

This field… Displays…

Type The currently active security protocol (IPSEC).

Source The IP address or address range of the entity from which the tunnel
originates.

The entity's type is indicated by an icon. See VPN Tunnel Icons on page
367.

366 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing VPN Tunnels

This field… Displays…

Destination The IP address or address range of the entity to which the tunnel is
connected.

The entity's type is indicated by an icon. See VPN Tunnel Icons on page
367.

Security The type of encryption used to secure the connection, and the type of
Message Authentication Code (MAC) used to verify the integrity of the
message. This information is presented in the following format: Encryption
type/Authentication type

Note: All VPN settings are automatically negotiated between the two sites.
The encryption and authentication schemes used for the connection are the
strongest of those used at the two sites.

Your VPN-1 Edge appliance supports AES, 3DES, and DES encryption
schemes, and MD5 and SHA authentication schemes.

Established The time at which the tunnel was established.

This information is presented in the format hh:mm:ss, where:

hh=hours

mm=minutes

ss=seconds

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 367


Viewing IKE Traces for VPN Connections

Table 73: VPN Tunnels Icons

This icon… Represents…

This gateway

A network for which an IKE Phase-2 tunnel was negotiated

A Remote Access VPN Server

A Site-to-Site VPN Gateway

A remote access VPN user

Viewing IKE Traces for VPN Connections

If you are experiencing VPN connection problems, you can save a trace of IKE
(Internet Key Exchange) negotiations to a file, and then use the free IKE View tool
to view the file.
The IKE View tool is available for the Windows platform.

Note: Before viewing IKE traces, it is recommended to do the following:

• The VPN-1 Edge appliance stores traces for all recent IKE negotiations.
If you want to view only new IKE trace data, clear all IKE trace data
currently stored on the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
• Close all existing VPN tunnels except for the problematic tunnel, so as
to make it easier to locate the problematic tunnel's IKE negotiation
trace in the exported file.

To clear all currently-stored IKE traces


1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the VPN Tunnels tab.
The VPN Tunnels page appears with a table of open tunnels to VPN sites.

368 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing IKE Traces for VPN Connections

2. Click Clear IKE Trace.


All IKE trace data currently stored on the VPN-1 Edge appliance is cleared.

To view the IKE trace for a connection


1. Establish a VPN tunnel to the VPN site with which you are experiencing
connection problems.
For information on when and how VPN tunnels are established, see Viewing
VPN Tunnels on page 365.
2. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the VPN Tunnels tab.
The VPN Tunnels page appears with a table of open tunnels to VPN sites.
3. Click Save IKE Trace.
A standard File Download dialog box appears.
4. Click Save.
The Save As dialog box appears.
5. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
6. Type a name for the *.elg file and click Save.
The *.elg file is created and saved to the specified directory. This file contains
the IKE traces of all currently-established VPN tunnels.
7. Use the IKE View tool to open and view the *.elg file, or send the file to
technical support.

Chapter 12: Working with VPNs 369


Changing Your Password

Chapter 13

Managing Users
This chapter describes how to manage VPN-1 Edge appliance users. You can
define multiple users, set their passwords, and assign them various permissions.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Changing Your Password .........................................................................371
Adding and Editing Users ........................................................................373
Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users.........................................................377
Viewing and Deleting Users.....................................................................379
Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users...............................................380
Using RADIUS Authentication ................................................................380
Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-Specific Attribute ..............................385

Changing Your Password

You can change your password at any time.

To change your password


1. Click Users in the main menu, and click the Internal Users tab.

Chapter 13: Managing Users 371


Changing Your Password

The Internal Users page appears.

2. In the row of your username, click Edit.


The Account Wizard opens displaying the Set User Details dialog box.

3. Edit the Password and Confirm password fields.

372 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing Users

Note: Use 5 to 25 characters (letters or numbers) for the new password.

4. Click Next.
The Set User Permissions dialog box appears.

5. Click Finish.
Your changes are saved.

Adding and Editing Users

This procedure explains how to add and edit users.


For information on quickly adding guest HotSpot users via a shortcut that the VPN-
1 Edge appliance provides, see Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users on page 377.

To add or edit a user


1. Click Users in the main menu, and click the Internal Users tab.
The Internal Users page appears.

Chapter 13: Managing Users 373


Adding and Editing Users

2. Do one of the following:


• To create a new user, click New User.
• To edit an existing user, click Edit next to the desire user.
The Account Wizard opens displaying the Set User Details dialog box.

3. Complete the fields using the information in Set User Details Fields on page
375.
4. Click Next.

374 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding and Editing Users

The Set User Permissions dialog box appears.

The options that appear on the page are dependant on the software and services
you are using.
5. Complete the fields using the information in Set User Permissions Fields on
page 376.
6. Click Finish.
The user is saved.

Table 74: Set User Details Fields

In this field… Do this…

Username Enter a username for the user.

Password Enter a password for the user. Use five to 25 characters (letters or
numbers) for the new password.

Confirm Password Re-enter the user’s password.

Chapter 13: Managing Users 375


Adding and Editing Users

In this field… Do this…

Expires On To specify an expiration time for the user, select this option and specify
the expiration date and time in the fields provided.

When the user account expires, it is locked, and the user can no longer
log on to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.

If you do not select this option, the user will not expire.

Table 75: Set User Permissions Fields

In this field... Do this...

Administrator Level Select the user’s level of access to the VPN-1 Edge Portal.

The levels are:

• No Access: The user cannot access the VPN-1 Edge Portal.


• Read/Write: The user can log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal
and modify system settings.
• Read Only: The user can log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal,
but cannot modify system settings or export the appliance
configuration via the Setup>Tools page. For example, you
could assign this administrator level to technical support
personnel who need to view the Event Log.

The default level is No Access.

The “admin” user’s Administrator Level (Read/Write) cannot be


changed.

VPN Remote Select this option to allow the user to connect to this VPN-1 Edge
Access appliance using their VPN client.

For further information on setting up VPN remote access, see Setting


Up Remote VPN Access for Users on page 380.

376 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users

Web Filtering Select this option to allow the user to override Web Filtering.
Override
This option only appears if the Web Filtering service is defined.

This option cannot be changed for the “admin” user.

HotSpot Access Select this option to allow the user to log on to the My HotSpot page.

For information on Secure HotSpot, see Configuring Secure HotSpot


on page 261.

Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users

The VPN-1 Edge appliance provides a shortcut for quickly adding a guest HotSpot
user. This is useful in situations where you want to grant temporary network access
to guests, for example in an Internet café. The shortcut also enables printing the
guest user's details in one click.
By default, the quick guest user has the following characteristics:
• Username in the format guest<number>, where <number> is a unique
three-digit number.
For example: guest123
• Randomly generated password
• Expires in 24 hours
• Administration Level: No Access
• Permissions: HotSpot Access only
For information on configuring Secure HotSpot, see Using Secure HotSpot on
page 261.

Chapter 13: Managing Users 377


Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users

To quickly create a guest user


1. Click Users in the main menu, and click the Internal Users tab.
The Internal Users page appears.
2. Click Quick Guest.
The Account Wizard opens displaying the Save Quick Guest dialog box.

3. In the Expires field, click on the arrows to specify the expiration date and time.
4. To print the user details, click Print.
5. Click Finish.
The guest user is saved.
You can edit the guest user's details and permissions using the procedure
Adding and Editing Users on page 373.

378 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing and Deleting Users

Viewing and Deleting Users

Note: The “admin” user cannot be deleted.

To view or delete users


1. Click Users in the main menu, and click the Internal Users tab.
The Internal Users page appears with a list of all users and their permissions.
The expiration time of expired users appears in red.
2. To delete a user, do the following:

a) In the desired user’s row, click the Erase icon.


A confirmation message appears.
b) Click OK.
The user is deleted.
3. To delete all expired users, do the following:
a) Click Clear Expired.
A confirmation message appears.
b) Click OK.
The expired users are deleted.

Chapter 13: Managing Users 379


Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users

Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users

If you are using your VPN-1 Edge appliance as a Remote Access VPN Server or as
an internal VPN Server, you can allow users to access it remotely through their
Remote Access VPN Clients (a Check Point SecureClient, Check Point
SecuRemote, or another Embedded NGX appliance).

To set up remote VPN access for a user


1. Enable your VPN Server, using the procedure Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge
Appliance as a VPN Server on page 314.
2. Add or edit the user, using the procedure Adding and Editing Users on page
373.
You must select the VPN Remote Access option.

Using RADIUS Authentication

You can use Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) to


authenticate both VPN-1 Edge appliance users and Remote Access VPN Clients
trying to connect to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Note: When RADIUS authentication is in use, Remote Access VPN Clients must
have a certificate.

When a user tries to log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal, the VPN-1 Edge appliance
sends the entered user name and password to the RADIUS server. The server then
checks whether the RADIUS database contains a matching user name and
password pair. If so, then the user is logged on.

380 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using RADIUS Authentication

By default, all RADIUS-authenticated users are assigned the set of permissions


specified in the VPN-1 Edge Portal's RADIUS page. However, you can configure
the RADIUS server to pass the VPN-1 Edge appliance a specific set of permissions
to grant the authenticated user, instead of these default permissions. This is done by
configuring the RADIUS Vendor-Specific Attribute (VSA) with a set of attributes
containing permission information for specific users. If the VSA is configured for a
user, then the RADIUS server passes the VSA to the Embedded NGX gateway as
part of the response to the authentication request, and the gateway assigns the user
permissions as specified in the VSA. If the VSA is not returned by the RADIUS
server for a specific user, the gateway will use the default permission set for this
user.

To use RADIUS authentication


1. Click Users in the main menu, and click the RADIUS tab.

Chapter 13: Managing Users 381


Using RADIUS Authentication

The RADIUS page appears.

2. Complete the fields using the table below.


3. Click Apply.
4. To restore the default RADIUS settings, do the following:
a) Click Default.
A confirmation message appears.
b) Click OK.
The RADIUS settings are reset to their defaults. For information on the
default values, refer to the table below.

382 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using RADIUS Authentication

5. To use the RADIUS VSA to assign permissions to users, configure the VSA.
See Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-Specific Attribute on page 385.

Table 76: RADIUS Page Fields

In this field… Do this…

Primary/Secondary Configure the primary and secondary RADIUS servers.


RADIUS Server
By default, the VPN-1 Edge appliance sends a request to the primary
RADIUS server first. If the primary RADIUS server does not respond
after three attempts, the VPN-1 Edge appliance will send the request to
the secondary RADIUS server.

Address Type the IP address of the computer that will run the RADIUS service
(one of your network computers) or click the corresponding This
Computer button to allow your computer to host the service.

To clear the text box, click Clear.

Port Type the port number on the RADIUS server’s host computer.

The default port number is 1812.

Shared Secret Type the shared secret to use for secure communication with the
RADIUS server.

Chapter 13: Managing Users 383


Using RADIUS Authentication

In this field… Do this…

Realm If your organization uses RADIUS realms, type the realm to append to
RADIUS requests. The realm will be appended to the username as
follows: <username>@<realm>

For example, if you set the realm to “myrealm”, and the user "JohnS"
attempts to log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal, the VPN-1 Edge
appliance will send the RADIUS server an authentication request with
the username “JohnS@myrealm”.

This field is optional.

Timeout Type the interval of time in seconds between attempts to communicate


with the RADIUS server.

The default value is 3 seconds.

RADIUS User If the RADIUS VSA (Vendor-Specific Attribute) is configured for a user,
Permissions the fields in this area will have no effect, and the user will be granted
the permissions specified in the VSA.

If the VSA is not configured for the user, the permissions configured in
this area will be used.

Administrator Level Select the level of access to the VPN-1 Edge Portal to assign to all
users authenticated by the RADIUS server.

The levels are:

• No Access: The user cannot access the VPN-1 Edge Portal


• Read/Write: The user can log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal
and modify system settings.
• Read Only: The user can log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal,
but cannot modify system settings.
The default level is No Access.

384 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-Specific Attribute

In this field… Do this…

Web Filtering Select this option to allow all users authenticated by the RADIUS server
Override to override Web Filtering.

This option only appears if the Web Filtering service is defined.

HotSpot Access Select this option to allow the user to access the My HotSpot page.

Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-Specific Attribute

For detailed instructions and examples, refer to the "Configuring the RADIUS
Vendor-Specific Attribute" white paper.

To assign permissions to specific RADIUS-authenticated users


1. Create a remote access policy as follows:
a) Assign the policy’s VSA (attribute 26) the SofaWare vendor code
(6983).
b) For each permission you want to grant, configure the relevant attribute
of the VSA with the desired value, as described in the table below.
For example, to assign the user VPN access permissions, set attribute number 2
to “true”.
2. Assign the policy to the desired user or user group.

Chapter 13: Managing Users 385


Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-Specific Attribute

Table 77: VSA Syntax

Permission Description Attribute Attribute Attribute Values Notes


Number Format

Admin Indicates the 1 String none. The user


administrator’s cannot access the
level of access to VPN-1 Edge
the Embedded Portal.
NGX Portal
readonly. The user
can log on to the
VPN-1 Edge
Portal, but cannot
modify system
settings.

readwrite. The user


can log on to the
VPN-1 Edge Portal
and modify system
settings.

VPN Indicates whether 2 String true. The user can This permission
the user can remotely access is only relevant if
access the the network via the VPN-1 Edge
network from a VPN. Remote Access
Remote Access VPN Server is
false. The user
VPN Client. enabled. The
cannot remotely
gateway must
access the
have a
network via VPN.
certificate.

386 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-Specific Attribute

Permission Description Attribute Attribute Attribute Values Notes


Number Format

Hotspot Indicates whether 3 String true. The user can This permission
the user can log access the Internet is only relevant if
on via the My via My HotSpot. the Secure
HotSpot page. HotSpot feature
false. The user
is enabled.
cannot access the
Internet via My
HotSpot.

UFP Indicates whether 4 String true. The user can This permission is
the user can override Web only relevant if
override Web Filtering. the Web Filtering
Filtering. service is
false. The user
enabled.
cannot override
Web Filtering.

Chapter 13: Managing Users 387


Viewing Firmware Status

Chapter 14

Maintenance
This chapter describes the tasks required for maintenance and diagnosis of your
VPN-1 Edge appliance.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Viewing Firmware Status .........................................................................389
Updating the Firmware.............................................................................391
Upgrading Your Software Product ...........................................................393
Registering Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance................................................397
Configuring Syslog Logging ....................................................................398
Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line ...................................400
Configuring HTTPS .................................................................................404
Configuring SSH ......................................................................................406
Configuring SNMP...................................................................................408
Setting the Time on the Appliance ...........................................................411
Using Diagnostic Tools ............................................................................415
Backing Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration ...........................429
Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults....................................432
Running Diagnostics ................................................................................435
Rebooting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance.....................................................436

Viewing Firmware Status

The firmware is the software program embedded in the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
You can view your current firmware version and additional details.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 389


Viewing Firmware Status

To view the firmware status

• Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
The Firmware page appears.

The Firmware page displays the following information:

Table 78: Firmware Status Fields

This field… Displays… For example…

WAN MAC Address The MAC address used for 00:80:11:22:33:44


the Internet connection

Firmware Version The current version of the 6.0


firmware

Installed Product The licensed software and VPN-1 Edge X unlimited nodes
the number of allowed
nodes

390 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Updating the Firmware

This field… Displays… For example…

Uptime The time that elapsed from 01:21:15


the moment the unit was
turned on

Hardware Type The type of the current Sbox-X


VPN-1 Edge appliance
hardware

Hardware Version The current hardware 1.0


version of the VPN-1 Edge
appliance

Updating the Firmware

If you are subscribed to Software Updates, firmware updates are performed


automatically. These updates include new product features and protection against
new security threats. Check with your reseller for the availability of Software
Updates and other services. For information on subscribing to services, see
Connecting to a Service Center on page 288.
When connected to SmartCenter, you can also update VPN-1 Edge firmware using
SmartCenter's SmartUpdate.component. For information refer to the Check Point
SmartUpdate documentation.
If you are not subscribed to the Software Updates service, you must update your
firmware manually.

To update your VPN-1 Edge firmware manually


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
The Firmware page appears.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 391


Updating the Firmware

2. Click Firmware Update.


The Firmware Update page appears.

3. Click Browse.
A browse window appears.
4. Select the image file and click Open.
The Firmware Update page reappears. The path to the firmware update image file
appears in the Browse text box.
5. Click Upload.
Your VPN-1 Edge appliance firmware is updated.
Updating may take a few minutes, during which time the PWR/SEC LED may
start flashing red or orange. Do not power off the appliance.
At the end of the process the VPN-1 Edge appliance restarts automatically.

392 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Upgrading Your Software Product

Upgrading Your Software Product

You can upgrade the VPN-1 Edge product installed on your appliance, by
purchasing a new license. You will receive a new Product Key that enables you to
use advanced features on the same VPN-1 Edge appliance you have today. There is
no need to replace your hardware. You can also purchase node upgrades, as
needed.
For example, if you have VPN-1 Edge X16 and you need secure Internet access for
more than 16 computers, you can upgrade to VPN-1 Edge X32 without changing
your hardware.

Note: You can only upgrade within the same appliance hardware
type.

Note: To purchase an upgrade, contact your VPN-1 Edge


appliance provider.

To upgrade your product, you must install the new Product Key.

Note: When managed by SmartCenter, the Product Key can be


installed from SmartCenter.
If the Product Key is centrally managed, it cannot be changed
locally.

To install a Product Key


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
The Firmware page appears.
2. Click Upgrade Product.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 393


Upgrading Your Software Product

The VPN-1 Edge Licensing Wizard opens, with the Install Product Key dialog box
displayed.

3. Click Enter a different Product Key.


4. In the Product Key field, enter the new Product Key.
5. Click Next.
The Installed New Product Key dialog box appears.

6. Click Next.

394 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Upgrading Your Software Product

The first Registration dialog box appears.

7. Do one of the following:


• To register your VPN-1 Edge appliance later on, clear the I want to
register my product check box and then click Next.

• To register your VPN-1 Edge appliance now, do the following:


1) Click Next.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 395


Upgrading Your Software Product

A second Registration dialog box appears.

2) Enter your contact information in the appropriate fields.


3) To receive email notifications regarding new firmware versions
and services, select the check box.
4) Click Next.
The Registration… screen appears.
The third Registration dialog box appears.

396 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Registering Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance

8. Click Finish.
Your VPN-1 Edge appliance is restarted and the Welcome page appears.

Registering Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance

If you want to activate your warranty and optionally receive notifications of new
firmware versions and services, you must register your VPN-1 Edge appliance.
Privacy Statement: Check Point is committed to protecting your privacy. We use
the information we collect about you to process orders and to improve our ability to
serve your needs. We will under no circumstances sell, lease, or otherwise disclose
any of your personal or contact details without your explicit permission.

To register your VPN-1 Edge appliance


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
The Firmware page appears.
2. Click Upgrade Product.
The VPN-1 Edge Licensing Wizard opens, with the Install Product Key dialog box
displayed.
3. Select Keep these settings.
4. Click Next.
The first Registration dialog box appears.
5. Verify that the I want to register my product check box is selected.
6. Click Next.
A second Registration dialog box appears.
7. Enter your contact information in the appropriate fields.
8. To receive email notifications regarding new firmware versions and services,
select the check box.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 397


Configuring Syslog Logging

9. Click Next.
The Registration… screen appears.
The third Registration dialog box appears.
10. Click Finish.
Your VPN-1 Edge appliance is restarted and the Welcome page appears.

Configuring Syslog Logging

You can configure the VPN-1 Edge appliance to send event logs to a Syslog server
residing in your internal network or on the Internet. The logs detail the date and the
time each event occurred. If the event is a communication attempt that was rejected
by the firewall, the event details include the source and destination IP address, the
destination port, and the protocol used for the communication attempt (for
example, TCP or UDP).
This same information is also available in the Event Log page (see Viewing the
Event Log on page 189). However, while the Event Log can display hundreds of
logs, a Syslog server can store an unlimited number of logs. Furthermore, Syslog
servers can provide useful tools for managing your logs.

Note: Kiwi Syslog Daemon is freeware and can be downloaded from


http://www.kiwisyslog.com. For technical support, contact Kiwi Enterprises.

Note: When managed by SmartCenter, the appliance


automatically sends logs to the SmartCenter Log Viewer using
a secure protocol.
You can still configure Syslog logging if desired.

398 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Syslog Logging

To configure Syslog logging


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Logging tab.
The Logging page appears.

2. Complete the fields using the information in the table below.


3. Click Apply.

Table 79: Logging Page Fields

In this field… Do this…

Syslog Server Type the IP address of the computer that will run the Syslog service
(one of your network computers), or click This Computer to allow your
computer to host the service.

Clear Click to clear the Syslog Server field.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 399


Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line

In this field… Do this…

Syslog Port Type the port number of the Syslog server.

Default Click to reset the Syslog Port field to the default (port 514 UDP).

Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line

Depending on your VPN-1 Edge model, you can control your appliance via the
command line in the following ways:
• Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal's command line interface.
See Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal on page 400.
• Using a console connected to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
For information, see Using the Serial Console on page 402.
• Using an SSH client.
See Configuring SSH on page 406.

Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal

You can control your appliance via the VPN-1 Edge Portal's command line
interface.

To control the appliance via the VPN-1 Edge Portal


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.

400 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line

The Tools page appears.

2. Click Command.
The Command Line page appears.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 401


Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line

3. In the upper field, type a command.


You can view a list of supported commands using the command help.
For information on all commands, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference
Guide.
4. Click Go.
The command is implemented.

Using the Serial Console

You can connect a console to the VPN-1 Edge appliance, and use the console to
control the appliance via the command line.

Note: Your terminal emulation software must be set to 57600 bps, N-8-1.

To control the appliance via a console


1. Connect the serial console to your VPN-1 Edge appliance's serial port, using an
RS-232 Null modem cable.
For information on locating the serial port, see Rear Panel on page 8.
2. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.

402 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line

The Ports page appears.

3. In the RS232 drop-down list, select Console.


4. Click Apply.
You can now control the VPN-1 Edge appliance from the serial console.
For information on all supported commands, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI
Reference Guide.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 403


Configuring HTTPS

Configuring HTTPS

You can enable VPN-1 Edge appliance users to access the VPN-1 Edge Portal from
the Internet. To do so, you must first configure HTTPS.

To configure HTTPS
1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Management tab.
The Management page appears.

2. Specify from where HTTPS access to the VPN-1 Edge Portal should be granted.
See Access Options on page 405 for information.

Warning: If remote HTTPS is enabled, your VPN-1 Edge appliance settings can be
changed remotely, so it is especially important to make sure all VPN-1 Edge
appliance users’ passwords are difficult to guess.

404 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring HTTPS

Note: You can use HTTPS to access the VPN-1 Edge Portal from your internal
network, by surfing to https://my.firewall.

If you selected IP Address Range, additional fields appear.

3. If you selected IP Address Range, enter the desired IP address range in the fields
provided.
4. Click Apply.
The HTTPS configuration is saved. If you configured remote HTTPS, you can
now access the VPN-1 Edge Portal through the Internet, using the procedure
Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely on page 46.

Table 80: Access Options

Select this To allow access from…


option…

Internal Network The internal network only.

This disables remote access capability.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 405


Configuring SSH

Select this To allow access from…


option…

Internal Network and The internal network and your VPN.


VPN

IP Address Range A particular range of IP addresses.

Additional fields appear, in which you can enter the desired IP address
range.

ANY Any IP address.

Disabled Nowhere.

This completely disables access. This option is only available for


SNMP.

Configuring SSH

VPN-1 Edge appliance users can control the appliance via the command line, using
the SSH (Secure Shell) management protocol. You can enable users to do so via
the Internet, by configuring remote SSH access. You can also integrate the VPN-1
Edge appliance with SSH-based management systems.

Note: The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports SSHv2 clients only. The SSHv1 protocol
contains security vulnerabilities and is not supported.

To configure SSH
1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Management tab.
The Management page appears.
2. Specify from where SSH access should be granted.

406 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring SSH

See Access Options on page 405 for information.

Warning: If remote SSH is enabled, your VPN-1 Edge appliance settings can be
changed remotely, so it is especially important to make sure all VPN-1 Edge
appliance users’ passwords are difficult to guess.

If you selected IP Address Range, additional fields appear.

3. If you selected IP Address Range, enter the desired IP address range in the fields
provided.
4. Click Apply.
The SSH configuration is saved. If you configured remote SSH access, you can
now control the VPN-1 Edge appliance from the Internet, using an SSHv2
client.
For information on all supported commands, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI
Reference Guide.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 407


Configuring SNMP

Configuring SNMP

The VPN-1 Edge appliance users can monitor the VPN-1 Edge appliance, using
tools that support SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). You can enable
users can do so via the Internet, by configuring remote SNMP access.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports the following SNMP MIBs:
• SNMPv2-MIB
• RFC1213-MIB
• IF-MIB
• IP-MIB
All SNMP access is read-only.

To configure SNMP
1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Management tab.
The Management page appears.
2. Specify from where SNMP access should be granted.
See Access Options on page 405 for information.
If you selected IP Address Range, additional fields appear.

408 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring SNMP

The Community field and the Advanced link are enabled.

3. If you selected IP Address Range, enter the desired IP address range in the fields
provided.
4. In the Community field, type the name of the SNMP community string.
SNMP clients uses the SNMP community string as a password, when
connecting to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
The default value is "public". It is recommended to change this string.
5. To configure advanced SNMP settings, click Advanced.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 409


Configuring SNMP

The SNMP Configuration page appears.

6. Complete the fields using the table below.


7. Click Apply.
The SNMP configuration is saved.
8. Configure the SNMP clients with the SNMP community string.

Table 81: Advanced SNMP Settings

In this field... Do this…

System Location Type a description of the appliance's location.

This information will be visible to SNMP clients, and is useful for


administrative purposes.

System Contact Type the name of the contact person.

This information will be visible to SNMP clients, and is useful for


administrative purposes.

410 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Setting the Time on the Appliance

In this field... Do this…

SNMP Port Type the port to use for SNMP.

The default port is 161.

Setting the Time on the Appliance

You set the time displayed in the VPN-1 Edge Portal during initial appliance setup.
If desired, you can change the date and time using the procedure below.

To set the time


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The Tools page appears.
2. Click Set Time.
The VPN-1 Edge Set Time Wizard opens displaying the Set the VPN-1 Edge Time
dialog box.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 411


Setting the Time on the Appliance

3. Complete the fields using the information in Set Time Wizard Fields on page
414.
4. Click Next.
The following things happen in the order below:
• If you selected Specify date and time, the Specify Date and Time dialog
box appears.

Set the date, time, and time zone in the fields provided, then click Next.

412 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Setting the Time on the Appliance

• If you selected Use a Time Server, the Time Servers dialog box appears.

Complete the fields using the information in Time Servers Fields on page
414, then click Next.
• The Date and Time Updated screen appears.

5. Click Finish.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 413


Setting the Time on the Appliance

Table 82: Set Time Wizard Fields

Select this option… To do the following…

Your computer's clock Set the appliance time to your computer’s system time.

Your computer’s system time is displayed to the right of this


option.

Keep the current time Do not change the appliance’s time.

The current appliance time is displayed to the right of this option.

Use a Time Server Synchronize the appliance time with a Network Time Protocol
(NTP) server.

Specify date and time Set the appliance to a specific date and time.

Table 83: Time Servers Fields

In this field… Do this…

Primary Server Type the IP address of the Primary NTP server.

Secondary Server Type the IP address of the Secondary NTP server.

This field is optional.

Clear Clear the field.

Select your time zone Select the time zone in which you are located.

414 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Diagnostic Tools

Using Diagnostic Tools

The VPN-1 Edge appliance is equipped with a set of diagnostic tools that are useful
for troubleshooting Internet connectivity.

Table 84: Diagnostic Tools

Use this To do this… For information, see...


tool…

Ping Check that a specific IP address or DNS Using IP Tools on page 416
name can be reached via the Internet.

Traceroute Display a list of all routers used to Using IP Tools on page 416
connect from the VPN-1 Edge appliance
to a specific IP address or DNS name.

WHOIS Display the name and contact information Using IP Tools on page 416
of the entity to which a specific IP address
or DNS name is registered. This
information is useful in tracking down
hackers.

Packet Sniffer Capture network traffic. This information is Using Packet Sniffer on page
useful troubleshooting network problems. 418

Chapter 14: Maintenance 415


Using Diagnostic Tools

Using IP Tools

To use an IP tool
1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The Tools page appears.
2. In the IP Tools drop-down list, select the desired tool.
3. In the Address field, type the IP address or DNS name for which to run the tool.
4. Click Go.
• If you selected Ping, the following things happen:
The VPN-1 Edge appliance sends packets to the specified the IP address or
DNS name.
The IP Tools window opens and displays the percentage of packet loss and
the amount of time it each packet took to reach the specified host and return
(round-trip) in milliseconds.

416 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Diagnostic Tools

• If you selected Traceroute, the following things happen:


The VPN-1 Edge appliance connects to the specified IP address or DNS
name.
The IP Tools window opens and displays a list of routers used to make the
connection.

• If you selected WHOIS, the following things happen:


The VPN-1 Edge appliance queries the Internet WHOIS server.
A window displays the name of the entity to which the IP address or DNS
name is registered and their contact information.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 417


Using Diagnostic Tools

Using Packet Sniffer

The VPN-1 Edge appliance includes the Packet Sniffer tool, which enables you to
capture packets from any internal network or VPN-1 Edge port. This is useful for
troubleshooting network problems and for collecting data about network behavior.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance saves the captured packets to a file on your computer.
You can use a free protocol analyzer, such as Ethereal, to analyze the file, or you
can send it to technical support. Ethereal runs on all popular computing platforms
and can be downloaded from http://www.ethereal.com.

To use Packet Sniffer


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The Tools page appears.
2. Click Sniffer.
The Packet Sniffer window opens.

3. Complete the fields using the information in the table below.


4. Click Start.

418 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Diagnostic Tools

The Packet Sniffer window displays the name of the interface, the number of
packets collected, and the percentage of storage space remaining on the
appliance for storing the packets.

5. Click Stop to stop collecting packets.


A standard File Download dialog box appears.
6. Click Save.
The Save As dialog box appears.
7. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
8. Type a name for the configuration file and click Save.
The *.cap file is created and saved to the specified directory.
9. Click Cancel to close the Packet Sniffer window.

Table 85: Packet Sniffer Fields

In this field… Do this…

Interface Select the interface from which to collect packets.

The list includes the primary Internet connection, the VPN-1 Edge
appliance ports, and all defined networks.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 419


Using Diagnostic Tools

In this field… Do this…

Filter String Type the filter string to use for filtering the captured packets. Only
packets that match the filter condition will be saved.

For a list of basic filter strings elements, see Filter String Syntax on
page 421.

For detailed information on filter syntax, go to


http://www.tcpdump.org/tcpdump_man.html.

Note: Do not enclose the filter string in quotation marks.

If you do not specify a filter string, Packet Sniffer will save all packets on
the selected interface.

Capture only traffic Select this option to capture incoming and outgoing packets for this
to/from this gateway gateway only.

If this option is not selected, Packet Sniffer will collect packets for all
traffic on the interface.

420 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Diagnostic Tools

Filter String Syntax


The following represents a list of basic filter string elements:
• and on page 421
• dst on page 422
• dst port on page 422
• ether proto on page 423
• host on page 424
• not on page 424
• or on page 425
• port on page 425
• src on page 426
• src port on page 426
• tcp on page 427
• udp on page 428
For detailed information on filter syntax, refer to http://www.tcpdump.org.

and
PURPOSE
The and element is used to concatenate filter string elements. The filtered packets
must match all concatenated filter string elements.
SYNTAX
element and element [and element...]
element && element [&& element...]

Chapter 14: Maintenance 421


Using Diagnostic Tools

PARAMETERS

element String. A filter string element.

EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that both originate from IP address is
192.168.10.1 and are destined for port 80:
src 192.168.10.1 and dst port 80

dst
PURPOSE
The dst element captures all packets with a specific destination.
SYNTAX
dst destination
PARAMETERS

destination IP Address or String. The computer to which the packet is


sent. This can be the following:

• An IP address
• A host name
EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that are destined for the IP address
192.168.10.1:
dst 192.168.10.1

dst port
PURPOSE
The dst port element captures all packets destined for a specific port.
SYNTAX
dst port port

422 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Diagnostic Tools

Note: This element can be prepended by tcp or udp. For information, see tcp on
page 427 and udp on page 428.

PARAMETERS

port Integer. The port to which the packet is sent.

EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that are destined for port 80:
dst port 80

ether proto
PURPOSE
The ether proto element is used to capture packets of a specific ether protocol
type.
SYNTAX
ether proto \protocol
PARAMETERS

protocol String. The protocol type of the packet.

This can be the following: ip,


ip6, arp, rarp,
atalk, aarp, dec net, sca, lat,
mopdl, moprc, iso, stp, ipx, or
netbeui.
EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves ARP packets:
ether proto arp

Chapter 14: Maintenance 423


Using Diagnostic Tools

host
PURPOSE
The host element captures all incoming and outgoing packets for a specific
computer.
SYNTAX
host host
PARAMETERS

host IP Address or String. The computer to/from which the packet


is sent. This can be the following:

• An IP address
• A host name
EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves all packets that either originated from IP address
192.168.10.1, or are destined for that same IP address:
host 192.168.10.1

not
PURPOSE
The not element is used to negate filter string elements.
SYNTAX
not element
! element
PARAMETERS

element String. A filter string element.

424 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Diagnostic Tools

EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that are not destined for port 80:
not dst port 80

or
PURPOSE
The or element is used to alternate between string elements. The filtered packets
must match at least one of the filter string elements.
SYNTAX
element or element [or element...]
element || element [|| element...]
PARAMETERS

element String. A filter string element.

EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that either originate from IP address
192.168.10.1 or IP address 192.168.10.10:
src 192.168.10.1 or src 192.168.10.10

port
PURPOSE
The port element captures all packets originating from or destined for a specific
port.
SYNTAX
port port

Note: This element can be prepended by tcp or udp. For information, see tcp on
page 427 and udp on page 428.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 425


Using Diagnostic Tools

PARAMETERS

port Integer. The port from/to which the packet is sent.

EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves all packets that either originated from port 80, or
are destined for port 80:
port 80

src
PURPOSE
The src element captures all packets with a specific source.
SYNTAX
src source
PARAMETERS

source IP Address or String. The computer from which the packet is


sent. This can be the following:

• An IP address
• A host name
EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that originated from IP address
192.168.10.1:
src 192.168.10.1

src port
PURPOSE
The src port element captures all packets originating from a specific port.
SYNTAX
src port port

426 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Using Diagnostic Tools

Note: This element can be prepended by tcp or udp. For information, see tcp on
page 427 and udp on page 428.

PARAMETERS

port Integer. The port to which the packet is sent.

EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that originated from port 80:
src port 80

tcp
PURPOSE
The tcp element captures all TCP packets. This element can be prepended to port-
related elements.

Note: When not prepended to other elements, the tcp element is the equivalent of
ip proto tcp.

SYNTAX
tcp
tcp element
PARAMETERS

element String. A port-related filter string element that should be


restricted to saving only TCP packets. This can be the
following:

• dst port - Capture all TCP packets destined


for a specific port.
• port - Captures all TCP packets originating
from or destined for a specific port.
• src port - Capture all TCP packets originating
from a specific port.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 427


Using Diagnostic Tools

EXAMPLE 1
The following filter string captures all TCP packets:
tcp

EXAMPLE 2
The following filter string captures all TCP packets destined for port 80:
tcp dst port 80

udp
PURPOSE
The udp element captures all UDP packets. This element can be prepended to port-
related elements.

Note: When not prepended to other elements, the udp element is the equivalent of
ip proto udp.

SYNTAX
udp
udp element
PARAMETERS

element String. A port-related filter string element that should be


restricted to saving only UDP packets. This can be the
following:

• dst port - Capture all UDP packets destined


for a specific port.
• port - Captures all UDP packets originating
from or destined for a specific port.
• src port - Capture all UDP packets
originating from a specific port.
EXAMPLE 1
The following filter string captures all UDP packets:

428 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Backing Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration

udp

EXAMPLE 2
The following filter string captures all UDP packets destined for port 80:
udp dst port 80

Backing Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance


Configuration

You can export the VPN-1 Edge appliance configuration to a *.cfg file, and use
this file to backup and restore VPN-1 Edge appliance settings, as needed. The file
includes all your settings.
The configuration file is saved as a textual CLI script. If desired, you can edit the
file. For a full explanation of the CLI script format and the supported CLI
commands, see the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.

Exporting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration

Exporting the VPN-1 Edge appliance configuration creates a configuration file.

To export the VPN-1 Edge appliance configuration


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The Tools page appears.
2. Click Export.
A standard File Download dialog box appears.
3. Click Save.
The Save As dialog box appears.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 429


Backing Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration

4. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.


5. Type a name for the configuration file and click Save.
The *.cfg configuration file is created and saved to the specified directory.

Importing the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration

In order to restore your VPN-1 Edge appliance’s configuration from a


configuration file, you must import the file.

To import the VPN-1 Edge appliance configuration


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The Tools page appears.
2. Click Import.
The Import Settings page appears.

430 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Backing Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration

3. Do one of the following:


• In the Import Settings field, type the full path to the configuration file.
Or
• Click Browse, and browse to the configuration file.
4. Click Upload.
A confirmation message appears.
5. Click OK.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance settings are imported.
The Import Settings page displays the configuration file's content and the result
of implementing each configuration command.

Note: If the appliance's IP address changed as a result of the configuration import,


your computer may be disconnected from the network; therefore you may not be
able to see the results.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 431


Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults

Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults

You can reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance to its default settings. When you reset
your VPN-1 Edge appliance, it reverts to the state it was originally in when you
purchased it. You can choose to keep the current firmware or to revert to the
firmware version that shipped with the VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Warning: This operation erases all your settings and password information. You will
have to set a new password and reconfigure your VPN-1 Edge appliance for Internet
connection. For information on performing these tasks, see Setting Up the VPN-1
Edge Appliance.

You can reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance to defaults via the Web management
interface (software) or by manually pressing the Reset button (hardware) located at
the back of the VPN-1 Edge appliance.

To reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance to factory defaults via the Web interface
1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The Tools page appears.
2. Click Factory Settings.

432 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults

A confirmation message appears.

3. To revert to the firmware version that shipped with the appliance, select the
check box.
4. Click OK.
• The Please Wait screen appears.

• The VPN-1 Edge appliance returns to its factory defaults.


• The VPN-1 Edge appliance is restarted (the PWR/SEC LED flashes
quickly).
This may take a few minutes.
• The Login page appears.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 433


Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults

To reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance to factory defaults using the Reset button
1. Make sure the VPN-1 Edge appliance is powered on.
2. Using a pointed object, press the RESET button on the back of the VPN-1 Edge
appliance steadily for seven seconds and then release it.
3. Allow the VPN-1 Edge appliance to boot-up until the system is ready
(PWR/SEC LED flashes slowly or illuminates steadily in green light).
For information on the appliance's front and rear panels, see the relevant Getting
to Know Your Appliance section in Introduction on page 1.

Warning: If you choose to reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance by disconnecting the
power cable and then reconnecting it, be sure to leave the VPN-1 Edge appliance
disconnected for at least three seconds, or the VPN-1 Edge appliance might not
function properly until you reboot it as described below.

434 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Running Diagnostics

Running Diagnostics

You can view technical information about your VPN-1 Edge appliance’s hardware,
firmware, license, network status, and Service Center.
This information is useful for troubleshooting. You can export it to an *.html file
and send it to technical support.

To view diagnostic information


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The Tools page appears.
2. Click Diagnostics.
Technical information about your VPN-1 Edge appliance appears in a new
window.
3. To save the displayed information to an *.html file:
a. Click Save.
A standard File Download dialog box appears.
b. Click Save.
The Save As dialog box appears.
c. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
d. Type a name for the configuration file and click Save.
The *.html file is created and saved to the specified directory.
4. To refresh the contents of the window, click Refresh.
The contents are refreshed.
5. To close the window, click Close.

Chapter 14: Maintenance 435


Rebooting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

Rebooting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

If your VPN-1 Edge appliance is not functioning properly, rebooting it may solve
the problem.

To reboot the VPN-1 Edge appliance


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
The Firmware page appears.
2. Click Restart.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click OK.
• The Please Wait screen appears.

• The VPN-1 Edge appliance is restarted (the PWR/SEC LED flashes


quickly).
This may take a few minutes.
• The Login page appears.

436 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Overview

Chapter 15

Using Network Printers


This chapter describes how to set up and use network printers.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Overview ..................................................................................................437
Setting Up Network Printers.....................................................................438
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers.....................................439
Viewing Network Printers ........................................................................449
Changing Network Printer Ports...............................................................449
Resetting Network Printers.......................................................................450

Overview
The VPN-1 Edge W series includes a built-in print server, enabling you to connect
USB-based printers to the appliance and share them across the network.

Note: When using computers with a Windows 2000/XP operating system, the VPN-1
Edge appliance supports connecting up to four USB-based printers to the
appliance. When using computers with a MAC OS-X operating system, the VPN-1
Edge appliance supports connecting one printer.

The appliance automatically detects printers as they are plugged in, and they
immediately become available for printing. Usually, no special configuration is
required on the VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Note: The VPN-1 Edge print server supports printing via "all-in-one" printers.
Copying and scanning functions are not supported.

Chapter 15: Using Network Printers 437


Setting Up Network Printers

Setting Up Network Printers

To set up a network printer


1. Connect the network printer to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
See Network Installation on page 37.
2. Turn the printer on.
3. In the VPN-1 Edge Portal, click Setup in the main menu, and click the Printers
tab.
The Printers page appears. If the VPN-1 Edge appliance detected the printer, the
printer is listed on the page.

4. If the printer is not listed, check that you connected the printer correctly, then
click Refresh to refresh the page.
5. Write down the port number allocated to the printer.

438 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers

The port number appears in the Printer Server TCP Port field. You will need this
number later, when configuring computers to use the network printer.
6. To change the port number, do the following:
a. Type the desired port number in the Printer Server TCP Port field.
Note: Printer port numbers may not overlap, and must be high ports.

b. Click Apply.
You may want to change the port number if, for example, the printer you are
setting up is intended to replace another printer. In this case, you should change
the replacement printer's port number to the old printer's port number, and you
can skip the next step.
7. Configure each computer from which you want to enable printing to the network
printer.
See Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers on page 439.

Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers

Perform the relevant procedure on each computer from which you want to enable
printing via the VPN-1 Edge print server to a network printer.

Windows 2000/XP
This procedure is relevant for computers with a Windows 2000/XP operating
system.

To configure a computer to use a network printer


1. If the computer for which you want to enable printing is located on the WAN,
create an Allow rule for connections from the computer to This Gateway.
See Adding and Editing Rules on page 216.

Chapter 15: Using Network Printers 439


Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers

2. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel.


The Control Panel window opens.
3. Click Printers and Faxes.
The Printers and Faxes window opens.
4. Right-click in the window, and click Add Printer in the popup menu.
The Add Printer Wizard opens with the Welcome dialog box displayed.

5. Click Next.
The Local or Network Printer dialog box appears.

6. Click Local printer attached to this computer.

440 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers

Note: Do not select the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer check
box.

7. Click Next.
The Select a Printer Port dialog box appears.

8. Click Create a new port.


9. In the Type of port drop-down list, select Standard TCP/IP Port.
10. Click Next.
The Add Standard TCP/IP Port Wizard opens with the Welcome dialog box
displayed.

11. Click Next.

Chapter 15: Using Network Printers 441


Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers

The Add Port dialog box appears.

12. In the Printer Name or IP Address field, type the VPN-1 Edge appliance's
LAN IP address, or "my.firewall".
You can find the LAN IP address in the VPN-1 Edge Portal, under Network > My
Network.
The Port Name field is filled in automatically.
13. Click Next.
The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard opens, with the Additional Port
Information Required dialog box displayed.

14. Click Custom.


15. Click Settings.

442 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers

The Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box opens.

16. In the Port Number field, type the printer's port number, as shown in the
Printers page.
17. In the Protocol area, make sure that Raw is selected.
18. Click OK.
The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard reappears.
19. Click Next.
The Completing the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears.

20. Click Finish.

Chapter 15: Using Network Printers 443


Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers

The Add Printer Wizard reappears, with the Install Printer Software dialog box
displayed.

21. Do one of the following:


• Use the lists to select the printer's manufacturer and model.
• If your printer does not appear in the lists, insert the CD that came with
your printer in the computer's CD-ROM drive, and click Have Disk.
22. Click Next.
23. Complete the remaining dialog boxes in the wizard as desired, and click
Finish.
The printer appears in the Printers and Faxes window.
24. Right-click the printer and click Properties in the popup menu.
The printer's Properties dialog box opens.
25. In the Ports tab, in the list box, select the port you added.

444 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers

The port's name is IP_<LAN IP address>.

26. Click OK.

MAC OS-X
This procedure is relevant for computers with the latest version of the MAC OS-X
operating system.

Note: This procedure may not apply to earlier MAC OS-X versions.

To configure a computer to use a network printer


1. If the computer for which you want to enable printing is located on the WAN,
create an Allow rule for connections from the computer to This Gateway.
See Adding and Editing Rules on page 216.
2. Choose Apple -> System Preferences.

Chapter 15: Using Network Printers 445


Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers

The System Preferences window appears.

3. Click Show All to display all categories.


4. In the Hardware area, click Print & Fax.
The Print & Fax window appears.

5. In the Printing tab, click Set Up Printers.

446 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers

The Printer List window appears.

6. Click Add.
New fields appear.

7. In the first drop-down list, select IP Printing.


8. In the Printer Type drop-down list, select Socket/HP Jet Direct.
9. In the Printer Address field, type the VPN-1 Edge appliance's LAN IP address,
or "my.firewall".
You can find the LAN IP address in the VPN-1 Edge Portal, under Network > My
Network.
10. In the Queue Name field, type the name of the required printer queue.
For example, the printer queue name for HP printers is RAW.

Chapter 15: Using Network Printers 447


Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers

11. In the Printer Model list, select the desired printer type.
A list of models appears.

12. In the Model Name list, select the desired model.


13. Click Add.
The new printer appears in the Printer List window.

14. In the Printer List window, select the newly added printer, and click Make
Default.

448 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Viewing Network Printers

Viewing Network Printers

To view network printers


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Printers tab.
The Printers page appears, displaying a list of connected printers.
For each printer, the model, serial number, port, and status is displayed.
A printer can have the following statuses:
• Initialize. The printer is initializing.
• Ready. The printer is ready.
• Not Ready. The printer is not ready. For example, it may be out of paper.
• Printing. The printer is processing a print job.
• Restarting. The printer server is restarting.
• Fail. An error occurred. See the Event Log for details (Viewing the Event
Log on page 189).
2. To refresh the display, click Refresh.

Changing Network Printer Ports

When you set up a new network printer, the VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically
assigns a port number to the printer. If you want to use a different port number, you
can easily change it, as described in Setting up Network Printers on page 438.
However, you may sometimes need to change the port number after completing
printer setup. For example, you may want to replace a malfunctioning network
printer, with another existing network printer, without reconfiguring the client

Chapter 15: Using Network Printers 449


Resetting Network Printers

computers. To do this, you must change the replacement printer's port number to
the malfunctioning printer's port number, as described below.

Note: Each printer port number must be different, and must be a high port.

To change a printer's port


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Printers tab.
The Printers page appears.
2. In the printer's Printer Server TCP Port field, type the desired port number.
3. Click Apply.

Resetting Network Printers

You can cause a network printer to restart the current print job, by resetting the
network printer. You may want to do this if the print job has stalled.

To reset a network printer


1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Printers tab.
The Printers page appears.
2. Next to the desired printer, click Reset.
The network printer's current print job is restarted.

450 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Resetting Network Printers

Chapter 16

Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions to common problems you may encounter while
using the VPN-1 Edge appliance.

Note: For information on troubleshooting wireless connectivity, see


Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity on page 185.

This chapter includes the following topics:


Connectivity ............................................................................................ 452
Service Center and Upgrades................................................................... 456
Other Problems ........................................................................................ 457

Chapter 16: Troubleshooting 451


Connectivity

Connectivity
I cannot access the Internet. What should I do?
• Check if the PWR/SEC LED is green. If not, check the power connection
to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
• Check if the WAN LINK/ACT LED is green. If not, check the network
cable to the modem and make sure the modem is turned on.
• Check if the LAN LINK/ACT LED for the port used by your computer is
green. If not, check if the network cable linking your computer to the
VPN-1 Edge appliance is connected properly. Try replacing the cable or
connecting it to a different LAN port.
• Using your Web browser, go to http://my.firewall and see whether
"Connected" appears on the Status Bar. Make sure that your VPN-1 Edge
appliance network settings are configured as per your ISP directions.
• Check your TCP/IP configuration according to Installing and Setting up
the VPN-1 Edge Appliance on page 17.
• If Web Filtering or Email Filtering are on, try turning them off.
• Check if you have defined firewall rules which block your Internet
connectivity.
• Check with your ISP for possible service outage.
• Check whether you are exceeding the maximum number of computers
allowed by your license, by viewing the Active Computers page.
I cannot access my DSL broadband connection. What should I do?
DSL equipment comes in two flavors: bridges (commonly known as DSL modems)
and routers. Some DSL equipment can be configured to work both ways.

452 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Connectivity

• If you connect to your ISP using a PPPoE or PPTP dialer defined in your
operating system, your equipment is most likely configured as a DSL
bridge. Configure a PPPoE or PPTP type DSL connection.
• If you were not instructed to configure a dialer in your operating system,
your equipment is most likely configured as a DSL router. Configure a
LAN connection, even if you are using a DSL connection.
For instructions, see Configuring the Internet Connection on page 55.
I cannot access my Cable broadband connection. What should I do?
• Some cable ISPs require you to register the MAC address of the device
behind the cable modem. You may need to clone your Ethernet adapter
MAC address onto the VPN-1 Edge appliance. For instructions, see
Configuring the Internet Connection on page 55.
• Some cable ISPs require using a hostname for the connection. Try
reconfiguring your Internet connection and specifying a hostname. For
further information, see Configuring the Internet Connection on page 55.
I cannot access http://my.firewall or http://my.vpn. What should I do?
• Verify that the VPN-1 Edge appliance is operating (PWR/SEC LED is
active)
• Check if the LAN LINK/ACT LED for the port used by your computer is
on. If not, check if the network cable linking your computer to the VPN-1
Edge appliance is connected properly.

Note: You may need to use a crossed cable when connecting the VPN-1 Edge
appliance to another hub/switch.

• Try surfing to 192.168.10.1 instead of to my.firewall.

Note: 192.168.10 is the default value, and it may vary if you changed it in the My
Network page.

Chapter 16: Troubleshooting 453


Connectivity

• Check your TCP/IP configuration according to Installing and Setting up


the VPN-1 Edge Appliance on page 17.
• Restart your VPN-1 Edge appliance and your broadband modem by
disconnecting the power and reconnecting after 5 seconds.
• If your Web browser is configured to use an HTTP proxy to access the
Internet, add "my.firewall" or "my.vpn" to your proxy exceptions list.

My network seems extremely slow. What should I do?


• The Ethernet cables may be faulty. For proper operation, the VPN-1 Edge
appliance requires STP CAT5 (Shielded Twisted Pair Category 5) Ethernet
cables. Make sure that this specification is printed on your cables.
• Your Ethernet card may be faulty or incorrectly configured. Try replacing
your Ethernet card.
• There may be an IP address conflict in your network. Check that the
TCP/IP settings of all your computers are configured to obtain an IP
address automatically.
I changed the network settings to incorrect values and am unable to correct my error. What
should I do?
Reset the network to its default settings using the button on the back of the VPN-1
Edge appliance unit. See Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults on page
432.
I am using the VPN-1 Edge appliance behind another NAT device, and I am having problems
with some applications. What should I do?
By default, the VPN-1 Edge appliance performs Network Address Translation
(NAT). It is possible to use the VPN-1 Edge appliance behind another device that
performs NAT, such as a DSL router or Wireless router, but the device will block
all incoming connections from reaching your VPN-1 Edge appliance.
To fix this problem, do ONE of the following. (The solutions are listed in order of
preference.)

454 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Connectivity

• Consider whether you really need the router. The VPN-1 Edge appliance
can be used as a replacement for your router, unless you need it for some
additional functionality that it provides, such as Wireless access.
• If possible, disable NAT in the router. Refer to the router’s documentation
for instructions on how to do this.
• If the router has a “DMZ Computer” or “Exposed Host” option, set it to the
VPN-1 Edge appliance’s external IP address.
• Open the following ports in the NAT device:
• UDP 9281/9282
• UDP 500
• TCP 256
• TCP 264
• ESP IP protocol 50
• TCP 981
I cannot receive audio or video calls through the VPN-1 Edge appliance. What should I do?
To enable audio/video, you must configure an IP Telephony (H.323) virtual server.
For instructions, see Configuring Servers on page 210.
I run a public Web server at home but it cannot be accessed from the Internet. What should I
do?
Configure a virtual Web Server. For instructions, see Configuring Servers on page
210.
I cannot connect to the LAN network from the DMZ network. What should I do?
By default, connections from the DMZ network to the LAN network are blocked.
To allow traffic from the DMZ to the LAN, configure appropriate firewall rules.
For instructions, see Using Rules on page 212.

Chapter 16: Troubleshooting 455


Service Center and Upgrades

Service Center and Upgrades


I purchased an advanced VPN-1 Edge model, but I only have the functionality of a simpler VPN-
1 Edge model. What should I do?
Your have not installed your product key. For further information, see Upgrading
Your Software Product on page 393.
I have exceeded my node limit. What does this mean? What should I do?
Your Product Key specifies a maximum number of nodes that you may connect to
the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance tracks the cumulative number of nodes on the internal
network that have communicated through the firewall. When the VPN-1 Edge
appliance encounters an IP address that exceeds the licensed node limit, the Active
Computers page displays a warning message and marks nodes over the node limit
in red. These nodes will not be able to access the Internet through the VPN-1 Edge
appliance, but will be protected. The Event Log page also warns you that you have
exceeded the node limit.
To upgrade your VPN-1 Edge appliance to support more nodes, purchase a new
Product Key. Contact your reseller for upgrade information.
While trying to connect to a Service Center, I received the message “The Service Center did not
respond”. What should I do?
• If you are using a Service Center other than the Check Point Service
Center, check that the Service Center IP address is typed correctly.
• The VPN-1 Edge appliance connects to the Service Center using UDP
ports 9281/9282. If the VPN-1 Edge appliance is installed behind another
firewall, make sure that these ports are open.

456 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Other Problems

Other Problems
I have forgotten my password. What should I do?
Reset your VPN-1 Edge appliance to factory defaults using the Reset button as
detailed in Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults on page 432.
Why are the date and time displayed incorrectly?
You can adjust the time on the Setup page's Tools tab. For information, see Setting
the Time on the Appliance on page 411.
I cannot use a certain network application. What should I do?
Look at the Event Log page. If it lists blocked attacks, do the following:
• Set the VPN-1 Edge appliance's firewall level to Low and try again.
• If the application still does not work, set the computer on which you want
to use the application to be the exposed host.
For instructions, see Defining an Exposed Host on page 266.
When you have finished using the application, make sure to clear the exposed host
setting, otherwise your security might be compromised.

Chapter 16: Troubleshooting 457


Technical Specifications

Chapter 17

Specifications
This chapter includes the following topics:
Technical Specifications.......................................................................... 459
CE Declaration of Conformity................................................................. 462
Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference
Statement ................................................................................................. 464

Technical Specifications
Table 86: VPN-1 Edge Appliance Attributes

Attribute VPN-1 Edge X VPN-1 Edge W

General

Dimensions 20.32 x 3.05 x 12.19 cm 20 x 3.1 x 15.5 cm


(width x height x depth) (8 x 1.2 x 4.8 inches) (7.9 x 1.2 x 6.1 inches)

Weight 0.7 kg (1.56 lbs) 0.69 kg (1.55 lbs)

Power supply nominal US Model: 90~132 VAC, All Models: 100~240VAC, 50~60Hz
input voltage, 50~60Hz
frequency
Japan Model: 100VAC,
50~60Hz

EU Model: 200~265 VAC,


50~60Hz

Chapter 17: Specifications 459


Technical Specifications

Attribute VPN-1 Edge X VPN-1 Edge W

Power supply nominal All Models: 9VAC, 1.5A All Models: 5VDC, 3A
output voltage

Max. Power 7.5W 8W (1.6A w/o external USB


Consumption devices)
13W (2.6A w USB devices)

Retail box dimensions 31 x 10 x 16 cm 29 x 25 x 7.6 cm


(width x height x depth) (12.4 x 4 x 6.4 inches) (11.4 x 9.8 x 3 inches)

Retail box weight 1.3 kg (2.9 lbs) 1.35 kg (3 lbs)

Environmental Conditions

Temperature: - 20°C to +70°C - 5°C to +70°C


Storage/Transport

Temperature: + 5°C to +45°C - 5°C ~ 50°C


Operation

Humidity: 5%~90% at 25°C/ 5%~90% at 25°C/


Storage/Operation None condensed None condensed

Applicable Standards

Shock & Vibration ETSI 300 019-2-3 CLASS 3.1 & CNS1219 C6343
Bellcore GR 63 (NEBS)

Safety EN60950/ EN60950/


IEC60950/ IEC60950/
UL60950 cTUVus 60950

460 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Technical Specifications

Attribute VPN-1 Edge X VPN-1 Edge W

Quality ISO9001 ISO9001:2000

TL9000-HW R3.0

ISO14001

Ohsas18001:
1999

Wireless

Operation Frequency 2.412-2.484 MHz

Transmission Power 79.4 mW

Modulation OFDM, DSSS, 64QAM, 16QAM,


QPSK, BPSK, CCK, DQPSK,
DBPSK

WPA Authentication EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP (EAP-


Modes GTC), PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2)

Chapter 17: Specifications 461


CE Declaration of Conformity

CE Declaration of Conformity
SofaWare Technologies Ltd., 3 Hilazon St., Ramat-Gan Israel, Hereby declares
that this equipment is in conformity with the essential requirements specified in
Article 3.1 (a) and 3.1 (b) of:
• Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive)
• Directive 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive – LVD)
• Directive 99/05/EEC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications
Terminal Equipment Directive)
In accordance with the following standards:

Table 87: VPN-1 Edge Appliance Standards

Attribute VPN-1 Edge X VPN-1 Edge W

EMC EN 55022:1998 EN 50081-1:1992

EN 61000-3-2: 1995 EN 50082-1:1997

EN 61000-3-3: 1995 EN 61000-6-1:2001

EN 61000-4-2:1995 EN 61000-6-3:2001

EN 61000-4-3:1995 EN 55022:1998

EN 61000-4-4:1995 EN 55024:1998

EN 61000-4-5:1995 EN 61000-3-2: 1995

EN 61000-4-6:1996 EN 61000-3-3: 1995

462 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


CE Declaration of Conformity

Attribute VPN-1 Edge X VPN-1 Edge W

EN 61000-4-8:1993 EN 61000-4-2:1995

EN 61000-4-11:1994 EN 61000-4-3:1996/A2:2001

ENV50204:1995 EN 61000-4-4:1995

EN 61000-4-5:1995

EN 61000-4-6:1996

EN 61000-4-7:1993

EN 61000-4-8:1993

EN 61000-4-9:1993

EN 61000-4-10:1993

EN 61000-4-11:1994

EN 61000-4-12:1995

Safety EN 60950: 2000 EN 60950: 2000

IEC 60950:1999 IEC 60950:1999

The "CE" mark is affixed to this product to demonstrate conformance to the


R&TTE Directive 99/05/EEC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications
Terminal Equipment Directive) and FCC Part 15 Class B.
The product has been tested in a typical configuration. For a copy of the Original
Signed Declaration (in full conformance with EN45014), please contact SofaWare
at the above address.

Chapter 17: Specifications 463


Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement

Federal Communications Commission Radio


Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment complies with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with
FCC regulations.
Any changes or modifications to this product not explicitly approved by the
manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment and any
assurances of Safety or Performance, and could result in violation of Part 15 of the
FCC Rules.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement for Wireless Models
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. The antenna(s) used for this equipment must be installed
to provide a separation distance of at least eight inches (20 cm) from all persons.
This equipment must not be operated in conjunction with any other antenna.

464 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Glossary of Terms

Glossary of Terms
A network. Cable modems offer a
high-speed 'always-on' connection.
ADSL Modem
A device connecting a computer to Certificate Authority
the Internet via an existing phone The Certificate Authority (CA)
line. ADSL (Asymmetric Digital issues certificates to entities such as
Subscriber Line) modems offer a gateways, users, or computers. The
high-speed 'always-on' connection. entity later uses the certificate to
identify itself and provide verifiable
C information. For instance, the
CA certificate includes the Distinguished
The Certificate Authority (CA) Name (DN) (identifying
issues certificates to entities such as information) of the entity, as well as
gateways, users, or computers. The the public key (information about
entity later uses the certificate to itself), and possibly the IP address.
identify itself and provide verifiable
information. For instance, the After two entities exchange and
certificate includes the Distinguished validate each other's certificates,
Name (DN) (identifying they can begin encrypting
information) of the entity, as well as information between themselves
the public key (information about using the public keys in the
itself), and possibly the IP address. certificates.

After two entities exchange and Cracking


validate each other's certificates, An activity in which someone breaks
they can begin encrypting into someone else's computer
information between themselves system, bypasses passwords or
using the public keys in the licenses in computer programs; or in
certificates. other ways intentionally breaches
computer security. The end result is
Cable Modem that whatever resides on the
A device connecting a computer to computer can be viewed and
the Internet via the cable television sensitive data can be stolen without

Glossary of Terms 465


Glossary of Terms

anyone knowing about it. Domain Name System


Sometimes, tiny programs are Domain Name System. The Domain
'planted' on the computer that are Name System (DNS) refers to the
designed to watch out for, seize and Internet domain names, or easy-to-
then transmit to another computer, remember "handles", that are
specific types of data. translated into IP addresses.

D An example of a Domain Name is


'www.sofaware.com'.
DHCP
Any machine requires a unique IP E
address to connect to the Internet Exposed Host
using Internet Protocol. Dynamic An exposed host allows one
Host Configuration Protocol computer to be exposed to the
(DHCP) is a communications Internet. An example of using an
protocol that assigns Internet exposed host would be exposing a
Protocol (IP) addresses to computers public server, while preventing
on the network. outside users from getting direct
DHCP uses the concept of a "lease" access form this server back to the
or amount of time that a given IP private network.
address will be valid for a computer.
F
DMZ Firmware
A DMZ (demilitarized zone) is an Software embedded in a device.
internal network defined in addition
to the LAN network and protected G
by the VPN-1 Edge appliance. Gateway
A network point that acts as an
DNS
The Domain Name System (DNS) entrance to another network.
refers to the Internet domain names, H
or easy-to-remember "handles", that
are translated into IP addresses. Hacking
An activity in which someone breaks
An example of a Domain Name is into someone else's computer
'www.sofaware.com'. system, bypasses passwords or
licenses in computer programs; or in

466 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Glossary of Terms

other ways intentionally breaches receiving data packets across the


computer security. The end result is Internet. When you request an
that whatever resides on the HTML page or send e-mail, the
computer can be viewed and Internet Protocol part of TCP/IP
sensitive data can be stolen without includes your IP address in the
anyone knowing about it. message and sends it to the IP
Sometimes, tiny programs are address that is obtained by looking
'planted' on the computer that are up the domain name in the Uniform
designed to watch out for, seize and Resource Locator you requested or
then transmit to another computer, in the e-mail address you're sending
specific types of data. a note to. At the other end, the
recipient can see the IP address of
HTTPS the Web page requestor or the e-mail
Hypertext Transfer Protocol over sender and can respond by sending
Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over another message using the IP address
SSL. it received.
A protocol for accessing a secure
IP Spoofing
Web server. It uses SSL as a
A technique where an attacker
sublayer under the regular HTTP
attempts to gain unauthorized access
application. This directs messages to
through a false source address to
a secure port number rather than the
make it appear as though
default Web port number, and uses a
communications have originated in a
public key to encrypt data
part of the network with higher
HTTPS is used to transfer access privileges. For example, a
confidential user information. packet originating on the Internet
may be masquerading as a local
Hub packet with the source IP address of
A device with multiple ports, an internal host. The firewall can
connecting several PCs or network protect against IP spoofing attacks
devices on a network. by limiting network access based on
I the gateway interface from which
data is being received.
IP Address
An IP address is a 32-bit number that
identifies each computer sending or

Glossary of Terms 467


Glossary of Terms

IPSEC MTU
IPSEC is the leading Virtual Private The Maximum Transmission Unit
Networking (VPN) standard. IPSEC (MTU) is a parameter that
enables individuals or offices to determines the largest datagram than
establish secure communication can be transmitted by an IP interface
channels ('tunnels') over the Internet. (without it needing to be broken
down into smaller units). The MTU
ISP should be larger than the largest
An ISP (Internet service provider) is datagram you wish to transmit un-
a company that provides access to fragmented. Note: This only
the Internet and other related prevents fragmentation locally.
services. Some other link in the path may
have a smaller MTU - the datagram
L will be fragmented at that point.
LAN Typical values are 1500 bytes for an
A local area network (LAN) is a Ethernet interface or 1452 for a PPP
group of computers and associated interface.
devices that share a common
communications line and typically N
share the resources of a single server NAT
within a small geographic area. Network Address Translation (NAT)
is the translation or mapping of an IP
M address to a different IP address.
MAC Address NAT can be used to map several
The MAC (Media Access Control) internal IP addresses to a single IP
address is a computer's unique address, thereby sharing a single IP
hardware number. When connected address assigned by the ISP among
to the Internet from your computer, a several PCs.
mapping relates your IP address to
your computer's physical (MAC) Check Point FireWall-1's Stateful
address on the LAN. Inspection Network Address
Translation (NAT) implementation
Mbps supports hundreds of pre-defined
Megabits per second. Measurement applications, services, and protocols,
unit for the rate of data transmission. more than any other firewall vendor.

468 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Glossary of Terms

NetBIOS PPTP
NetBIOS is the networking protocol The Point-to-Point Tunneling
used by DOS and Windows Protocol (PPTP) allows extending a
machines. local network by establishing private
“tunnels” over the Internet. This
P protocol it is also used by some DSL
Packet providers as an alternative for
A packet is the basic unit of data that PPPoE.
flows from one source on the
Internet to another destination on the R
Internet. When any file (e-mail RJ-45
message, HTML file, GIF file etc.) is The RJ-45 is a connector for digital
sent from one place to another on the transmission over ordinary phone
Internet, the file is divided into wire.
"chunks" of an efficient size for
routing. Each of these packets is Router
separately numbered and includes A router is a device that determines
the Internet address of the the next network point to which a
destination. The individual packets packet should be forwarded toward
for a given file may travel different its destination. The router is
routes through the Internet. When connected to at least two networks.
they have all arrived, they are
reassembled into the original file at
S
the receiving end. Server
A server is a program (or host) that
PPPoE awaits and requests from client
PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over programs across the network. For
Ethernet) enables connecting example, a Web server is the
multiple computer users on an computer program, running on a
Ethernet local area network to a specific host, that serves requested
remote site or ISP, through common HTML pages or files. Your browser
customer premises equipment (e.g. is the client program, in this case.
modem).
Stateful Inspection
Stateful Inspection was invented by
Check Point to provide the highest

Glossary of Terms 469


Glossary of Terms

level of security by examining every divides the file into one or more
layer within a packet, unlike other packets, numbers the packets, and
systems of inspection. Stateful then forwards them individually to
Inspection extracts information the IP program layer. Although each
required for security decisions from packet has the same destination IP
all application layers and retains this address, it may get routed differently
information in dynamic state tables through the network.
for evaluating subsequent connection At the other end (the client program
attempts. In other words, it learns!
in your computer), TCP reassembles
Subnet Mask the individual packets and waits until
A 32-bit identifier indicating how they have arrived to forward them to
the network is split into subnets. The you as a single file.
subnet mask indicates which part of
TCP/IP
the IP address is the host ID and TCP/IP (Transmission Control
which indicates the subnet.
Protocol/Internet Protocol) is the
T underlying communication protocol
of the Internet.
TCP
TCP (Transmission Control U
Protocol) is a set of rules (protocol)
UDP
used along with the Internet Protocol UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a
(IP) to send data in the form of communications protocol that offers
message units between computers a limited amount of service when
over the Internet. While IP takes care messages are exchanged between
of handling the actual delivery of the computers in a network that uses the
data, TCP takes care of keeping Internet Protocol (IP). UDP is an
track of the individual units of data alternative to the Transmission
(called packets) that a message is Control Protocol (TCP) and, together
divided into for efficient routing with IP, is sometimes referred to as
through the Internet. UDP/IP. Like the Transmission
For example, when an HTML file is Control Protocol, UDP uses the
sent to you from a Web server, the Internet Protocol to actually get a
Transmission Control Protocol data unit (called a datagram) from
(TCP) program layer in that server one computer to another. Unlike

470 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Glossary of Terms

TCP, however, UDP does not


provide the service of dividing a
message into packets (datagrams)
and reassembling it at the other end.
UDP is often used for applications
such as streaming data.

URL
A URL (Uniform Resource Locator)
is the address of a file (resource)
accessible on the Internet. The type
of resource depends on the Internet
application protocol. On the Web
(which uses the Hypertext Transfer
Protocol), an example of a URL is
'http://www.sofaware.com'.

V
VPN
A virtual private network (VPN) is a
private data network that makes use
of the public telecommunication
infrastructure, maintaining privacy
through the use of a tunneling
protocol and security procedures.

VPN tunnel
A secure connection between a
Remote Access VPN Client and a
Remote Access VPN Server.

Glossary of Terms 471


Index

Index
cable type • 37
8
certificate
802.1x • 163, 165
explained • 357
A generating self-signed • 358
account, configuring • 294 importing • 362
active computers, viewing • 196 installing • 357
active connections, viewing • 199 uninstalling • 364
Allow and Forward rules, explained • 216 Cisco IOS DOS • 240
Allow rules, explained • 216 command line interface
Automatic login • 353 controlling the appliance via • 400

B D
backup connection DHCP
configuring • 92 configuring • 96
dialup • 93 explained • 466
LAN or broadband • 92 options • 103
Block Known Ports • 250 DHCP Server
Block Port Overflow • 251 enabling/disabling • 96
Block rules, explained • 216 explained • 96
Blocked FTP Commands • 253 diagnostic tools
Packet Sniffer • 418
C
Ping • 415
CA, explained • 357, 465
Traceroute • 415
cable modem
using • 415
connection • 60, 68
WHOIS • 415
explained • 465

Index 473
Index

diagnostics • 435 F
dialup File and Print Sharing • 254
connection • 76, 93 firewall
modem • 85 levels • 207
dialup modem, setting up • 85 rule types • 214
DMZ setting security level • 207
configuring • 109 firmware
configuring High Availability for • 121 explained • 389, 466
explained • 109, 466 updating manually • 391
DNS • 92, 415, 466 viewing status • 389
Dynamic DNS • 6, 287, 293 FTP Bounce • 249

E G
Email Antispam, see Email Filtering • 300 gateways
Email Antivirus, see Email Filtering • 300 backup • 121
Email Filtering default • 109, 121, 140
Email Antispam • 300 explained • 466
Email Antivirus • 300 ID • 293
enabling/disabling • 301 master • 121
selecting protocols for • 302 Site-to-Site VPN • 308
snoozing • 302
H
temporarily disabling • 302
Hide NAT
event log, viewing • 189
enabling/disabling • 108
exposed host
explained • 108, 468
defining a computer as • 266
high availability
explained • 266, 466
configuring • 121
explained • 121

474 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Index

Host Port Scan • 246 IP address


HTTPS changing • 107
configuring • 404 explained • 467
explained • 467 hiding • 108
using • 46 IP Fragments • 235
hub • 8, 37, 92, 121, 452, 467 IPSEC
VPN mode • 5, 467
I
ISP, explained • 468
IGMP • 255
IKE traces, viewing • 368 L
initial login • 41 LAN
installation cable • 37
cable type • 37 configuring High Availability for • 121
network • 37 connection • 56, 58, 66
Instant Messengers • 259 explained • 468
internal VPN Server ports • 3, 8, 37
configuring • 317 LAND • 229
explained • 313 licenses • 196, 389, 435, 452
Internet connection upgrading • 393
configuring • 55 link configurations, modifying • 150
configuring backup • 92 logs
enabling/disabling • 90 exporting • 189
establishing quick • 90 viewing • 189
terminating • 92
M
troubleshooting • 452
MAC address • 468
viewing information • 88
Manual Login • 353
Internet Setup • 65
Max Ping Size • 234
Internet Wizard • 56

Index 475
Index

MTU, explained • 78, 468 O


OfficeMode
N
about • 111
NetBIOS, explained • 468
configuring • 111
network
changing internal range of • 107 P
configuring • 95 packet • 88, 140, 415, 467, 469
configuring a DMZ • 109 Packet Sanity • 232
configuring a VLAN • 113 Packet Sniffer
configuring a WLAN • 163 filter string syntax • 421
configuring DHCP options • 103 using • 418
configuring high availability • 121 Pass rules, explained • 274
configuring the OfficeMode network • password
111
changing • 371
enabling DHCP Server on • 96
setting up • 41
enabling Hide NAT • 108
Peer to Peer • 257
installation on • 37
Ping • 415
managing • 95
Ping of Death • 228
objects • 130
Port-based VLAN
network objects
about • 113
adding and editing • 131
adding and editing • 116
using • 130
ports
viewing and deleting • 139
managing • 146
Network Quota • 237
modifying assignments • 148
node limit, viewing • 196
modifying link configurations • 150
Non-TCP Flooding • 230
resetting to defaults • 150
Null Payload • 242
viewing statuses • 147
PPTP

476 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Index

connection • 63, 72 Remote Access VPN Servers


explained • 469 configuring • 314, 316
print server • 437 explained • 308
printers Remote Access VPN sites • 322
changing ports • 449 reports
configuring computers to use • 439 active computers • 196
resetting • 450 active connections • 199
setting up • 438 event log • 189
using • 437 node limit • 196
viewing • 449 traffic • 193
Product Key • 393 viewing • 189
wireless statistics • 200
Q
routers • 92, 121, 415, 452, 469
QoS classes
rules
adding and editing • 156
security • 212
assigning services to • 212
VStream Antivirus • 273
built-in • 155, 162
deleting • 161 S
restoring defaults • 162 Scan rules, explained • 274
Secure HotSpot
R
customizing • 264
RADIUS
enabling/disabling • 263
configuring VSA • 385
quick guest users • 377
explained • 380
setting up • 262
using • 380
using • 261
rebooting • 436
SecuRemote
registering • 397
explained • 313
Remote Access VPN Clients, explained •
308 installing • 319

Index 477
Index

security disconnecting from • 295


configuring servers • 210 refreshing a connection to • 294
creating rules • 212 services
defining a computer as an exposed host • Email Filtering • 300
266
software updates • 304, 391
firewall • 207
Web Filtering • 296
Secure HotSpot • 261
Setup Wizard • 41, 56
SmartDefense • 223
Site-to-Site VPN gateways • 319
security policy
explained • 308
default • 206
installing a certificate • 357
setting up • 205
PPPoE tunnels • 319
security rules
Small PMTU • 244
adding and editing • 216
SMART Management • 287
changing priority • 222
SmartDefense
deleting • 223
categories • 226
enabling/disabling • 222
configuring • 224
types • 216
using • 223
using • 212
SNMP
serial console • 8, 11
configuring • 408
controlling appliance via • 402
explained • 408
using • 402
software updates • 391
servers
checking for manually • 304
configuring • 210
explained • 304
explained • 469
source routing, about • 140
Remote Access VPN • 308, 314
SSH
Web • 130, 210, 452
configuring • 406
Service Center
explained • 406
connecting to • 288

478 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Index

Stateful Inspection • 1, 468, 469 setting up for Windows XP/2000 • 18


Static NAT Teardrop • 227
explained • 130 technical support • 15
using • 131 Telstra • 74
static routes Traceroute • 415
adding and editing • 140 Traffic Monitor
explained • 140 configuring • 195
using • 140 exporting reports • 195
viewing and deleting • 145 using • 193
Strict TCP • 243 viewing reports • 193
subnet masks, explained • 470 traffic reports
subscription services exporting • 195
starting • 288 viewing • 193
viewing information • 293 Traffic Shaper
Sweep Scan • 246 advanced • 153
Syslog logging enabling • 65
configuring • 398 restoring defaults • 162
explained • 398 setting up • 154
simplified • 153
T
using • 153
Tag-based VLAN
troubleshooting • 451
about • 113
typographical conventions • xi
adding and editing • 118
TCP, explained • 470 U
TCP/IP UDP, explained • 470
explained • 470 URL, explained • 471
setting up for MAC OS • 28 users
setting up for Windows 95/98 • 23 adding and editing • 373

Index 479
Index

adding quick guest HotSpot • 377 VPN tunnels


managing • 371 creation and closing of • 365
setting up remote VPN access for • 380 establishing • 353
viewing and deleting • 379 explained • 308, 471
viewing • 365
V
VPN-1 Edge
Vendor-Specific Attribute
rear panel • 11
about • 380
VPN-1 Edge series
configuring • 273
features • 3
VLAN
VPN-1 Edge appliance
adding and editing • 116, 118
about • 1
deleting • 120
backing up • 429
port-based • 113, 116
changing internal IP address of • 107
tag-based • 113, 118
configuring Internet connection • 55
VPN
exporting configuration • 429
explained • 308, 471
features • 3
Remote Access • 312, 319
importing configuration • 430
sites • 308, 351, 352, 353
installing • 17, 37
Site-to-Site • 310, 319
maintenance • 389
tunnnels • 308, 353, 365
models • 2
viewing IKE traces • 368
mounting • 32
VPN functionality • 309
rebooting • 436
VPN sites
registering • 397
adding and editing using VPN-1 Edge X
• 319 resetting to factory defaults • 432
deleting • 351 setting the time • 411
enabling/disabling • 352 setting up • 38
logging on • 353 technical specifications • 459

480 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide


Index

VPN-1 Edge Portal W


elements • 48 WAN
initial login • 41 cable • 37
logging on • 44 connections • 212
remotely accessing • 46 ports • 3, 8, 37, 92
using • 48 Web Filtering
VPN-1 Edge W series enabling/disabling • 296
front panel • 13 selecting categories for • 297
rear panel • 11 snoozing • 298
VPN-1 Edge X series temporarily disabling • 298
front panel • 9 Welchia • 239
rear panel • 8 WEP • 163, 165
VStream Antivirus WHOIS • 415
about • 269 wireless hardware • 164
configuring • 273 wireless protocols • 165
configuring advanced settings • 281 wireless stations
configuring policy • 273 preparing • 184
enabling/disabling • 271 viewing • 200
rules • 274 WLAN
updating • 285 configuring • 163
viewing database information • 272 preparing stations for • 184
VStream Antivirus rules troubleshooting connectivity • 185
adding and editing • 275 viewing statistics for • 200
changing priority • 280 WPA • 163, 165
deleting • 280 WPA2 • 165
enabling/disabling • 279 WPA-PSK • 163, 165
types • 274

Index 481

You might also like